MIL-STD-2073 - Standard Practice for Military

Packaging
Subject/Scope:
This document outlines standard processes for the development and documentation of
military packaging, as distinct from commercial packaging. This standard covers
methods of preservation to protect materiel against environmentally induced corrosion
and deterioration, physical and mechanical damage, and other forms of degradation
during storage, multiple handling, and shipment of materiel in the defense transportation
system. A decision chart is included for determining the applicability of commercial or
military packaging practices (see figure 1). If military packaging is applicable, figure 1
will further aid in the development of detailed packaging requirements.

Keywords:
Mil, container, packaging, type, requirement, material, class, unit, astm, method, preservation, military,
sealed, document, packing, cushioning, shipping, wood, design, specification, document, pack, heat, rsc,
category, size, government, corrosion, fiberboard, contract, reusable, protection, standard, storage,
watervaporproof, barrier, style, greaseproof, level, grade, test, waterproof, flexible, method, resistant,
fragility, drawing, requirement, system, desiccant, water, plastic, sealable, shock, identification, equipment

Published:
5/23/2008

Text in blue boxes such as this one is instructional and is intended to assist you in understanding the document.

Text in red boxes such as this explains changes made to the document by The Wooden Crates Organization.

Red text has been added to the document or modifies the document since its final version was officially published.

Soft Conversion of Imperial to Metric

Conversions, when made, consider materials that are available in metric or imperial sizes rather than converting
sizes exactly. For example: Panelboard (plywood) in the US is typically 4 feet X 8 feet (1220 x 2440 mm) while
panelboard in metric countries is typically 1200 X 2400 mm. Since the standard was developed based on readily
available materials these variations in material sizes could not have been practically considered.

The content of the document below has not been modified.

 NOT MEASUREMENT
SENSITIVE

MIL-STD-2073-1E
23 May 2008
SUPERSEDING
MIL-STD-2073-1D
15 December 1999

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
STANDARD PRACTICE FOR
MILITARY PACKAGING

AMSC N7296 AREA PACK

 MIL-STD-2073-1E

FOREWORD

1. Details and decision logic for the use of this standard are described in 1.1, 1.2, figure
1, and 6.11.

2. This standard is approved for use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department
of Defense.

3. For additional guidance on the contents of this document, contact the Commanding
Officer, Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division Lakehurst, (Code 6.7.2.4), Bldg. 596-2,
Highway 547, Lakehurst, NJ 08733.

4. Comments, suggestions, or questions on this document should be addressed to:

Commanding Officer, Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division, (Code 41K000B120-3),
Highway 547, Lakehurst, NJ 08733-5100, or email to michael.sikora@navy.mil. Since contact
information can change, you may want to verify the currency of this address information using
the ASSIST Online database at http://assist.daps.dla.mil.

ii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

1. SCOPE..............................................................................................................1
1.1 Purpose.........................................................................................................1
1.2 Applicability ................................................................................................1
1.2.1 Applicability determination .........................................................................1

2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................3

2.1 General.........................................................................................................3
2.2 Government documents ...............................................................................3
2.2.1 Specifications and standards........................................................................3
2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications .........................4
2.3 Non-Government publications.....................................................................5
2.4 Order of precedence.....................................................................................5

3. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................6
3.1 General.........................................................................................................6
3.2 Categorization ..............................................................................................6
3.3 Common group items...................................................................................6
3.4 Consumable..................................................................................................6
3.5 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS)...............................................6
3.6 Critical items................................................................................................6
3.7 Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) items .........................................7
3.8 Fragility factor .............................................................................................7
3.9 Hazardous material ......................................................................................7
3.10 Military packaging...................................................................................... 7
3.11 Packaging design validation ........................................................................8
3.12 Repairable item ............................................................................................8
3.13 Reusable container .......................................................................................8
3.14 Sealed...........................................................................................................9
3.15 Selective group items...................................................................................9
3.16 Special group items......................................................................................9

4. GENERAL MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS.........................10

4.1 General.......................................................................................................10
4.1.1 Options.......................................................................................................10
4.2 Development of military packaging details and data requirements.......... 10
4.3 Hazardous material ....................................................................................10

iii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)

Paragraph Page

4.4 Packaging of classified items.....................................................................10

4.5 Quantity per unit pack (QUP) ....................................................................10
4.6 Containers ..................................................................................................10
4.7 Kits.............................................................................................................10
4.8 Repairable excess and residual parts .........................................................11
4.9 Loose fill materials ....................................................................................11
4.10 Shock and vibration absorption .................................................................11
4.11 Determination of item fragility ..................................................................11
4.12 Packaging materials ...................................................................................11

5. DETAILED MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS........................11

5.1 General military package design considerations .......................................11
5.2 Military preservation..................................................................................12
5.2.1 Cleaning and drying...................................................................................12
5.2.2 Preservatives ..............................................................................................12
5.2.2.1 Preservative applicability...........................................................................12
5.2.2.2 Application of contact preservatives..........................................................12
5.2.2.3 Application and use criteria of volatile corrosion inhibitors (VCI)...........12
5.2.3 Methods of military preservation - general requirements..........................13
5.2.3.1 Surfaces coated with preservatives ............................................................14
5.2.3.2 Metal surfaces not coated with preservatives ............................................14
5.2.3.3 Method 10 - Physical protection................................................................14
5.2.3.4 Method 20 – Physical protection with preservative (with
greaseproof wrap, as required).............................................................15
5.2.3.5 Method 30 - Waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof protection with
preservative ..........................................................................................15
5.2.3.5.1 Method 31 - Waterproof bag, heat sealed..................................................15
5.2.3.5.2 Method 32 - Container, waterproof bag, heat sealed.................................15
5.2.3.5.3 Method 33 - Greaseproof-waterproof bag, heat sealed............................. 16
5.2.3.6 Method 40 - Watervaporproof protection with
preservative as required .......................................................................16
5.2.3.6.1 Method 41 - Watervaporproof bag, heat sealed.........................................16
5.2.3.6.2 Method 42 - Container, watervaporproof bag, heat sealed, container.......16
5.2.3.6.3 Method 43 - Floating watervaporproof bag, heat sealed ...........................17
5.2.3.6.4 Method 44 - Rigid container (other than metal), sealed ............................17
5.2.3.6.5 Method 45 - Rigid metal container, sealed ................................................17

iv
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)

Paragraph Page

5.2.3.7 Method 50 - Watervaporproof protection with desiccant......................... 17

5.2.3.7.1 Method 51 - Watervaporproof bag with desiccant, heat sealed.................19
5.2.3.7.2 Method 52 - Container, watervaporproof bag with
desiccant, heat sealed, container ......................................................... 19
5.2.3.7.3 Method 53 - Floating watervaporproof bag with
desiccant, heat sealed.......................................................................... 20
5.2.3.7.4 Method 54 - Rigid container (other than metal) with
desiccant, sealed...................................................................................20
5.2.3.7.5 Method 55 - Rigid metal container with desiccant, sealed ........................20
5.2.4 Military preservation requirements for items with
specific characteristics .........................................................................21
5.2.4.1 Electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) items .........................................21
5.2.4.2 Items capable of disassembly.....................................................................21
5.2.4.3 Flexible-coilable items...............................................................................21
5.2.4.4 Caging or damping.....................................................................................21
5.2.4.5 Items with mounts......................................................................................21
5.2.4.6 Rubber and synthetic rubber items ............................................................21
5.2.4.7 Hazardous items.........................................................................................21
5.2.4.8 Moveable parts...........................................................................................21
5.2.4.9 Items compatible with VCI........................................................................21
5.2.4.10 Vacuum sensitive items .............................................................................22
5.3 Level A and B packing requirements ........................................................22
5.3.1 Intermediate containers..............................................................................22
5.3.2 Exterior containers.....................................................................................22
5.3.2.1 Container selection ....................................................................................22
5.4 Minimal packing requirements ..................................................................23
5.5 Marking......................................................................................................23
5.6 Military packaging design validation provisions.......................................23
5.7 Quality assurance provisions .....................................................................23

6. NOTES ...........................................................................................................24
6.1 Intended use ...............................................................................................24
6.2 Acquisition requirements ...........................................................................24
6.3 Associated Data Item Descriptions (DIDs) ...............................................24
6.4 Testing facilities.........................................................................................25
6.5 Subject term (key word) listing .................................................................25
6.6 Copies of regulations .................................................................................25

v
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)

Paragraph Page

6.7 Changes from previous issue .....................................................................25

6.8 Changes in methods of preservation designations.....................................25
6.9 Conversion of heat sealable bag designators .............................................26
6.10 Supersession...............................................................................................26
6.11 Commercial packaging applicability .........................................................27

FIGURES

Figure Page

1 Military packaging requirements development decision chart.........................2

TABLES

Table Page

I Approximate fragility factors .........................................................................28

II Method of preservation vs. appropriate MIL-DTL-117 bag
designations and materials .........................................................................29
III Heat-sealable bag designator conversion chart ..............................................30

vi
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES

APPENDIX A
DEVELOPMENT OF MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

Paragraph Page

A.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................31

A.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ......................................................................31

A.2.1 General.......................................................................................................31
A.2.2 Government documents .............................................................................31
A.2.2.1 Specifications and standards......................................................................31
A.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications .......................34
A.2.3 Non-Government publications...................................................................35

A.3 USE OF EXISTING PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS...............................36

A.3.1 Application.................................................................................................36

A.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ..........................................................................36

A.4.1 General.......................................................................................................36
A.4.2 Hazardous material package testing ..........................................................36
A.4.3 Hazardous material shipment documentation............................................36

A.5 MILITARY PACKAGING CODE DEVELOPMENT..................................36

A.5.1 Item classification ......................................................................................36
A.5.2 Item characteristics ....................................................................................37
A.5.3 Categorization ............................................................................................37
A.5.3.1 Category code ............................................................................................37
A.5.3.2 Category code development.......................................................................38
A.5.3.2.1 First category – physical and chemical characteristics..............................38
A.5.3.2.1.1 Item composition/properties criteria..........................................................38
A.5.3.2.1.2 Critical item criteria ...................................................................................39
A.5.3.2.1.3 Contact preservative criteria ......................................................................39
A.5.3.2.2 Second category – weight/size/fragility.....................................................39
A.5.3.2.3 Third category – preservatives...................................................................39
A.5.4 Military packaging code development.......................................................39
A.5.4.1 Military packaging codes for common items.............................................39
A.5.4.2 Military packaging codes for selective items ............................................40
A.5.5 Recording of developed packaging data ....................................................40

vii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX A (Continued)

Paragraph Page

A.6 CONTAINER SELECTION...........................................................................40

A.7 FORMULAS...................................................................................................40

A.8 PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION .......................................................40

A.8.1 Common items ...........................................................................................40
A.8.2 Selective and special items ........................................................................40

FIGURES

Figure Page

A-1 Format for interpretation of packaging code sequence ..................................41

A-2 Military packaging data development flow chart ...........................................42

TABLES

Table Page

A-I Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination ..............43

A-II Weight/size/and non-operational fragility category code determination .......49
A-III Contact preservative category code determination.........................................50
A-IV Predetermined military packaging data for common items............................55
A-V Calculation of material sizes and weights ......................................................59
A-VI Procedural packaging specifications ..............................................................61

viii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX B
FACTORS AND FORMULAE ESTABLISHING MILITARY PACKAGING QUP AND ICQ

Paragraph Page

B.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................63

B.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..................................................................... 63

B.3 DETERMINATION OF QUP ........................................................................63

B.3.1 Repairable items (depot or field level) or items designated
Hi-value or Hi-priority.........................................................................63
B.3.2 Consumable items......................................................................................63
B.3.3 Irregular configuration, delicate or fragile items .......................................63
B.3.4 Pairs and sets items ....................................................................................63
B.3.5 Items unit packed in accordance with Method 50 .....................................63
B.3.6 Kit ..............................................................................................................64
B.3.7 Lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope ..................................................64
B.3.8 Factors and formulae establishing QUP ....................................................64
B.3.8.1 Consumable items having both maintenance and
overhaul applications ...........................................................................64
B.3.8.2 Consumable items having overhaul applications only ..............................64

B.4 QUANTITY PER UNIT PACK DETERMINATION FORMULAE ............66

B.4.1 Formula A ..................................................................................................66
B.4.2 Formula B ..................................................................................................67

B.5 DETERMINATION OF ICQ .........................................................................68

B.5.1 Quantities per intermediate container ........................................................68
B.5.2 Intermediate container limitations .............................................................68

TABLES

Table Page

B-I Guidance for establishing number of unit packs per

intermediate container................................................................................69

ix
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX C
CONTAINERS

Paragraph Page

C.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................70

C.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ......................................................................70

C.2.1 General.......................................................................................................70
C.2.2 Government documents .............................................................................70
C.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and drawings .....................................................70
C.2.2.2 Other Government Documents, Drawings and Publications .....................72
C.2.3 Non-Government publications...................................................................72

C.3 GENERAL......................................................................................................73
C.3.1 Unit container size .....................................................................................73
C.3.2 Use of unit containers as shipping containers............................................73

C.4 EXPENDABLE CONTAINERS....................................................................73

C.4.1 Interior containers ......................................................................................73
C.4.2 Exterior containers.....................................................................................73

C.5 REUSABLE CONTAINERS .........................................................................73

C.5.1 Specialized containers................................................................................73
C.5.1.1 Design ........................................................................................................73
C.5.1.2 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS).............................................74
C.5.1.3 Specialized shipping containers for ordnance ...........................................74
C.5.2 Multiapplication containers .......................................................................74
C.5.2.1 Design and selection ..................................................................................74
C.5.2.2 Identification ..............................................................................................74
C.5.2.3 Coded data .................................................................................................74
C.5.2.4 Packaging design validation ......................................................................74
C.5.2.5 Short life containers ...................................................................................75
C.5.2.6 Long life containers ...................................................................................76
C.5.2.7 Multiapplication container availability......................................................76
C.5.2.7.1 General Services Administration (GSA) ...................................................76

x
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX C (Continued)

Paragraph Page

C.5.2.7.2 Naval Inventory Control Point (NAVICP) ................................................77

C.5.2.7.3 Commercial sources...................................................................................77

TABLES

Table Page

C-I Interior containers...........................................................................................78

C-II Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum weight of
contents and level of packing.....................................................................79
C-III Fiberboard container size list..........................................................................83
C-IV Multiapplication container selection ..............................................................85

APPENDIX D
DEVELOPMENT OF MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS FOR KITS (PARTS AND
MODIFICATION)

Paragraph Page

D.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................95

D.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ......................................................................95

D.3 PRESERVATION ..........................................................................................95
D.3.1 Consolidation of different items within a method of preservation ............95
D.3.2 Application of preservative compounds or oils .........................................96
D.3.2.1 Kits procured for oxygen equipment .........................................................96
D.3.2.2 Preservation procedures.............................................................................96
D.3.2.3 Items susceptible to corrosion (iron, steel, magnesium, etc.) ....................96

D.4 UNIT PRESERVATION................................................................................96

D.4.1 Physical protection.....................................................................................96
D.4.2 Segregation of items within packs ............................................................96
D.4.3 Skin packaging...........................................................................................96

xi
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX D (Continued)

Paragraph Page

D.4.3.1 Skin packaging metals ...............................................................................96

D.4.3.2 Skin packaging shims or gaskets ...............................................................97

D.5 PACKING AND MARKING OF KITS.........................................................97

APPENDIX E
MILITARY PACKAGING DATA FORMS

E.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................99

E.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ......................................................................99

E.2.1 General.......................................................................................................99
E.2.2 Government documents .............................................................................99
E.2.2.1 Standards....................................................................................................99
E.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings, and publications ......................99
E.2.3 Non-Government publications.................................................................100

E.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................100

E.3.1 Development of military packaging data.................................................100
E.3.2 Recording military packaging data ..........................................................100
E.3.2.1 Recording of data.....................................................................................100
E.3.2.2 National Stock Number (NSN) requirements ..........................................100
E.3.2.3 Coded data ...............................................................................................100
E.3.2.4 Kits (Parts and Modification) ..................................................................101
E.3.2.5 Special packaging instructions.................................................................101

E.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS...................................................................101

E.4.1 Development of military packaging data.................................................101
E.4.1.1 Procedural specification data ...................................................................101
E.4.2 Preparation of military packaging data....................................................101
E.4.2.1 Nomenclature...........................................................................................102
E.4.2.2 Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity code
and part number .................................................................................102
E.4.2.3 Configuration item (CI) ...........................................................................102
E.4.2.4 Item identification data ............................................................................102

xii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX E (Continued)

Paragraph Page

E.4.2.5 Preservation and packing data .................................................................102

E.4.2.6 Supplemental data....................................................................................102
E.4.2.7 Special packaging instruction (SPI) data .................................................102

E.5 SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTIONS................................................103

E.5.1 General.....................................................................................................103
E.5.2 Format ......................................................................................................103
E.5.3 Elements...................................................................................................103
E.5.4 Detailed requirements ..............................................................................105
E.5.4.1 Package assembly instructions.................................................................105
E.5.4.2 Bill of materials .......................................................................................105
E.5.4.3 Specification containers...........................................................................105

E.6 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED PACKAGING

DATA ...........................................................................................................106
E.6.1 Procedures for submitting data for approval............................................106
E.6.1.1 Approval of data without National Stock Numbers.................................106
E.6.1.2 Approval of data for emergency shipments .............................................106
E.6.1.3 Approval of data of interest to one DoD agency .....................................106
E.6.1.4 Use of background data for approval.......................................................106
E.6.1.5 Data for common items............................................................................106
E.6.2 Return of approved data...........................................................................106
E.6.3 Authentication..........................................................................................107
E.6.4 Transmittal of data .................................................................................. 107
E.6.4.1 Military packaging data ...........................................................................107
E.6.4.2 Special packaging instructions.................................................................107

xiii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX E (Continued)

FIGURES

Figure Page

E-1 Preservation and Packing Data .....................................................................117

TABLES

Table Page

E-I Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 ..............................108

E-II Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 ........................111
E-III. Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326 ......................................114
E-IV Special packaging instruction data for PART D of DD Form 2326.............116

APPENDIX F
MILITARY PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION PROVISIONS

Paragraph Page

F.1 SCOPE..........................................................................................................119

F.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ....................................................................119

F.2.1 General.....................................................................................................119
F.2.2 Government documents ...........................................................................119
F.2.2.1 Standards..................................................................................................119
F.2.2.2 Other Government documents .................................................................119
F.2.3 Non-Government publications.................................................................120

F.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................120
F.3.1 Packaging design validation tests ............................................................120
F.3.2 Hazardous material ..................................................................................121
F.3.3 Ammunition unit loads ............................................................................121

F.4 TEST METHODS ........................................................................................121

F.4.1 Container performance tests ....................................................................121
F.4.2 Preservation tests .....................................................................................121

xiv
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX F (Continued)

Paragraph Page

F.5 OTHER .........................................................................................................121

F.5.1 Acceptance criteria and disposition of test samples ................................121

APPENDIX G
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS

Paragraph Page

G.1 SCOPE..........................................................................................................123

G.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ....................................................................123

G.2.1 General.....................................................................................................123
G.2.2 Government documents ...........................................................................123
G.2.2.1 Specifications and standards....................................................................123

G.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................124
G.3.1 Quality system .........................................................................................124
G.3.2 Quality assurance requirements ...............................................................124
G.3.3 Sampling ..................................................................................................124
G.3.3.1 Lot size.....................................................................................................124
G.3.3.2 Sampling for inspection ...........................................................................124

G.4 PRESERVATION INSPECTIONS..............................................................124

G.4.1 Visual preservation examinations............................................................124
G.4.2 Leakage test .............................................................................................124
G.4.2.1 Wetting ....................................................................................................125
G.4.2.2 Selection of technique..............................................................................125
G.4.2.2.1 Vacuum retention technique ....................................................................125
G.4.2.2.1.1 Sealed rigid container ..............................................................................125
G.4.2.2.1.2 Sealed flexible bag...................................................................................125
G.4.2.2.2 Submersion (or immersion) technique.....................................................126
G.4.2.2.3 Pneumatic pressure technique..................................................................126
G.4.2.2.4 Hot water technique .................................................................................126
G.4.2.2.5 Squeeze technique (applicable only to flexible specimens) ....................126

xv
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX G (Continued)

Paragraph Page

G.4.3 Heat-sealed seam test...............................................................................126

G.4.3.1 Selection of samples for heat-sealed seam tests ......................................126
G.4.3.1.1 Alternate sampling procedure for heat-sealed seam test .........................126
G.4.3.2 Performance of heat-sealed seam test ......................................................127

G.5 PACKING INSPECTIONS ..........................................................................127

G.5.1 Examination procedures ..........................................................................127

TABLES

Table Page

G-I Preservation inspection provisions ...............................................................128

G-II Leakage and heat-sealed seam test provisions .............................................129

APPENDIX H
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS

Paragraph Page

H.1 SCOPE..........................................................................................................131

H.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ....................................................................131

H.3 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS...................................................................131

H.3.1 Design search request submittal ..............................................................131
H.3.2 CDRS Office search response..................................................................131
H.3.3 Design activity action on CDRS Office response....................................132
H.3.3.1 Negative response from CDRS Office.....................................................132
H.3.3.1.1 Submittal of container design data...........................................................132
H.3.3.2 Positive response from CDRS Office ......................................................132
H.3.3.2.1 Item (Inventory) manager notification.....................................................132
H.3.3.2.2 Container design agent notification .........................................................133

xvi
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX J
MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENT CODES

Paragraph Page

J.1 SCOPE..........................................................................................................135

J.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ....................................................................135

J.2.1 General.....................................................................................................135
J.2.2 Government documents ...........................................................................135
J.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and handbooks.................................................135
J.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications .....................138
J.2.3 Non-Government publications.................................................................139

J.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................140

J.3.1 Code system .............................................................................................140
J.3.2 Procedure and responsibilities for revisions ............................................140
J.3.2.1 Adding codes ...........................................................................................141

J.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS...................................................................141

J.4.1 General code requirements ......................................................................141
J.4.2 Preservation methods ...............................................................................141
J.4.2.1 Specialized preservation ..........................................................................141
J.4.3 Quantity per unit pack..............................................................................142
J.4.4 Cleaning ...................................................................................................142
J.4.5 Preservative..............................................................................................142
J.4.6 Wrapping material ...................................................................................142
J.4.7 Cushioning and dunnage..........................................................................142
J.4.8 Thickness of cushioning or dunnage .......................................................142
J.4.9 Unit and intermediate container...............................................................142
J.4.9.1 Options.....................................................................................................142
J.4.10 Unit container level and optional procedure indicator codes ..................142
J.4.11 Unit packs per intermediate container .....................................................143
J.4.12 Intermediate container .............................................................................143
J.4.12.1 Intermediate container limitations ...........................................................143
J.4.13 Packing.....................................................................................................143
J.4.14 Special markings......................................................................................143

J.5 CROSS INDEX ............................................................................................143

J.5.1 Document number to table and code .......................................................143

xvii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

CONTENTS (Continued)
APPENDICES (Continued)

APPENDIX J (Continued)

TABLES

Table Page

J-I Methods of preservation codes .....................................................................144

J-Ia Specialized preservation codes.....................................................................145
J-II Cleaning procedure codes.............................................................................151
J-III Contact preservative material codes .............................................................152
J-IIIa Contact preservative material codes in specification sequence....................154
J-IV Wrapping material codes ..............................................................................156
J-IVa Wrapping material codes in specification sequence.....................................157
J-V Cushioning and dunnage material codes ......................................................158
J-Va Cushioning and dunnage material codes in specification sequence .............160
J-VI Thickness of cushioning or dunnage codes ..................................................161
J-VII Unit and intermediate container codes .........................................................162
J-VIIa Unit and intermediate container codes in specification sequence ................166
J-VIII Unit container level codes ............................................................................169
J-VIIIa Optional procedure indicator codes..............................................................170
J-IX Level A military packing requirement codes ...............................................171
J-IXa Level B military packing requirement codes................................................172
J-IXb Minimal packing requirement codes ............................................................173
J-X Special marking codes ..................................................................................175
J-XI Document number to table and code cross-reference index.........................176

INDEX .........................................................................................................................................183

xviii
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

1. SCOPE

1.1 Purpose. This document outlines standard processes for the development and
documentation of military packaging, as distinct from commercial packaging. This standard
covers methods of preservation to protect materiel against environmentally induced corrosion
and deterioration, physical and mechanical damage, and other forms of degradation during
storage, multiple handling, and shipment of materiel in the defense transportation system. A
decision chart is included for determining the applicability of commercial or military packaging
practices (see figure 1). If military packaging is applicable, figure 1 will further aid in the
development of detailed packaging requirements.

1.2 Applicability. The requirements of this standard apply to items for which military
packaging is required to meet operational demands. These items include but are not limited to:

a. Items that cannot be protected and preserved in a cost-effective manner using

standard practices for commercial packaging

b. Items delivered during wartime for deployment with or sustainment to operational

units

c. Items that are depot level repairables

d. Items requiring reusable containers

e. Items intended for delivery-at-sea

f. Security Assistance/Foreign Military Sales/Grant Aid (unless otherwise directed by

the destination country)

1.2.1 Applicability determination. Further guidance on the criteria for determining

applicability of this standard is discussed in 6.11.

1
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

* Will commercial packaging be technically adequate and cost-effective in

meeting the anticipated distribution and environmental requirements of
this item for this procurement from the time of acquisition to consumption
by the end user?
YES NO

* Are there existing adequate

Package and ship IAW ASTM
military packaging
D3951. Mark in accordance
with MIL-STD-129. requirements for the item?

NO YES

Use existing
Is item hazardous? requirements.
(See A.3.1)

NO YES

Is item consumable? Package IAW A.4

YES NO

Is item fragility factor equal Is item fragility factor

to or greater than 85 G's? less than 50 G's?
(See 3.8 and Table I)
YES NO
YES NO

Are item weight,

Are item weight & Are item weight
dimensions and
dimensions within limits and dimensions
fragility factor
specified by Table A-II? within limits
within limits
specified for
specified for
YES NO containers listed in
containers listed in
Table C-IV?
Table C-IV?
Can item packaging be YES NO YES NO
Categorize IAW Appendix A
described by codes in Appendix
as common item
J and supplemental data?
Could items of Is it cost effective to use
YES NO Do multi-application
lower or unknown multi-application
containers meet logistic
fragility be containers?
needs?
protected by
Select Appendix J codes and Is specialized long life multi-application
add supplemental data, as req'd container required? YES NO containers? (See
(See C.5) YES NO
(selective item); (See 5.6 for Table C-IV)
validation requirement) YES NO YES NO
Will 10 trip short life
container meet logistics
Interrogate Container Design needs? Can item packaging
Retrieval System (CDRS) be described by codes
(See C.5.1.2) in Appendix J and
YES NO
supplemental data, as
req'd?

Is CDRS response positive? Will 100 trip long life

Use 10 trip short life
container meet logistics
container
YES NO needs?
(See C.5.2.5)

Use design "AS IS" or Design package using YES YES NO

NO
modify if required. special packaging
Determine availability instruction (SPI) guide-
of suitable containers in lines specified in
Appendix E (See 5.6 for Use 100 trip long life Select Appendix J codes
DoD inventory for reuse
validation requirements) container IAW Appendix A format
and validate use for item
(See C.5.2.6) (See 5.6 for validation
requirements)

* These decisions are to be made by the DOD contracting activity (packaging organization) prior to RFQ or solicitation.

FIGURE 1. Military packaging requirements development decision chart.

2
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections 3, 4, or 5 of
this standard. This section does not include documents cited in other sections of this
specification or recommended for additional information or as examples. While every effort has
been made to ensure the completeness of this list, document users are cautioned that they must
meet all specified requirements of documents cited in sections 3, 4, or 5 of this standard, whether
or not they are listed.

2.2 Government documents.

2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards form a
part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of
these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS

QQ-A-1876 - Aluminum Foil.

PPP-B-1672 - Box, Shipping, Reusable with Cushioning.

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION

A-A-3174 - Plastic Sheet, Polyolefin.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-DTL-117 - Bags, Heat-Sealable.

MIL-PRF-121 - Barrier Materials, Greaseproof, Waterproof, Flexible,
Heat-Sealable.
MIL-PRF-131 - Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof, Greaseproof,
Flexible, Heat-Sealable.
MIL-PRF-3420 - Packaging Materials, Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor,
Treated, Opaque.
MIL-D-3464 - Desiccants, Activated, Bagged, Packaging Use and Static
Dehumidification.
MIL-DTL-6060 - Bags, Watervaporproof, Heat-Sealable, Complex.
MIL-I-8574 - Inhibitors, Corrosion, Volatile, Utilization of.
MIL-PRF-16173 - Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback,
Cold-Application.
MIL-PRF-22019 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.

3
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

MIL-B-22020 - Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile Corrosion

Inhibitor Treated.
MIL-PRF-22191 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Heat-Sealable.
MIL-PRF-81705 - Barrier Materials, Flexible, Electrostatic Protective, Heat-
Sealable.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-129 - Military Marking for Shipment and Storage.

MIL-STD-3010 - Test Procedures for Packaging Materials.
MS20003 - Indicator, Humidity, Card, Three Spot, Impregnated
Areas (Cobaltous Chloride).

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch

or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following other
Government documents, drawings and publications form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE MANUAL

DoD-5220.22M - National Industrial Security Program Operating Manual

(NISPOM).

(Copies of this document is available online at http://www.DTIC.mil/ or from the

National Technical Information Services (NTIS), 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA
22161.)

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR - Labor.
40 CFR - Protection of Environment.
49 CFR - Transportation.

(Copies of these documents are available online at www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/ or from the

Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, North Capital & “H” Streets,
N.W., Washington, DC 20402-0002.)

4
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these
documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM-D996 - Standard Terminology of Packaging and Distribution

Environments (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D1974 - Standard Practice for Methods of Closing, Sealing, and
Reinforcing Fiberboard Boxes (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D4279 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Shipping
Containers – Constant and Cycle Methods.
ASTM-D5118/ - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Fiberboard Shipping Boxes
D5118M (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5168 - Standard Practice for Fabrication and Closure of Triple Wall
Corrugated Fiberboard Containers (DoD adopted).

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://www.astm.org or from ASTM

International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

SAE INTERNATIONAL

SAE-AS26860 - Indicator, Humidity, Plug, Color Change (DoD adopted).

(Copies of this document are available online at http://www.sae.org or from SAE

International, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.)

2.4 Order of precedence. In the event of a conflict between the text of this document
and the references cited herein, the text of this document takes precedence. Nothing in this
document, however, supersedes applicable laws and regulations unless a specific exemption has
been obtained.

5
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

3. DEFINITIONS

3.1 General. Definitions of terms unique to this standard are listed below. Definitions
of other terms commonly used in the packaging community may be found in ASTM-D996.

3.2 Categorization. The process of evaluating an item by chemical and physical

characteristics that are significant in determining the preservation requirements.

3.3 Common group items. Items with a fragility rating of 85 G's (see 3.8) or more which
have no dimension greater than 24 inches and weigh not more than 10 pounds for which
predetermined packaging has been developed (see A.5.4.1 and table A-IV). Hazardous
materials, electrostatic discharge sensitive items, shelf life items, sets, outfits, and kits are
excluded from this group regardless of their fragility, size, or weight.

3.4 Consumable. An item of supply (except explosive ordnance, major end items of
equipment, and repairables) that is normally expended or used up beyond recovery in the use for
which it was designed or intended.

3.5 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). A management system program to

provide a DoD centralized automated data base system for storing, retrieving and analyzing
existing container designs and test information concerning specialized containers. The purpose
of the CDRS is to avoid duplication in container designs, minimize the number of new container
designs being developed and promote reuse of existing DoD specialized containers for new item
development and procurement (see Appendix H).

3.6 Critical items. Items meeting one or more of the following criteria are considered
critical.

a. Critical chemically. Items which are of such a nature that any degree of
deterioration (in the form of corrosion, stain, scale, mold, fungi, or bacteria) caused
by oxygen, moisture, sunlight, living organisms, and other contaminants which are
time or temperature dependent, will result in premature failure or malfunction of
the item or equipment in which the item is installed or with which the item
interfaces.

b. Critical physically. Items that would become unfit for use as a result of physical
action on the item or any integral surfaces thereof. This includes, but is not limited
to, items having a surface finish of 64 microinches root mean square or less, items
which have surfaces that mate with surfaces of other parts, optical and reflective

6
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

devices having highly polished surfaces, items requiring a high degree of

cleanliness, and items requiring special protection against shock, vibration, or
abrasion.

c. Critical application. Items that, either in assembly or operation, provide an

essential attribute to attaining critical military objectives.

3.7 Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) items. Electronic items that are
susceptible to damage or degradation as a result of an electrostatic discharge event.

3.8 Fragility factor. Maximum force acceleration or deceleration expressed in units of

gravity (G's) that can be applied to an item in its non-operating state without causing physical
damage or changes in its operational characteristics. The fragility factor is expressed in units of
acceleration for a defined shock pulse. Shock pulse forms and durations which approximate the
transportation and handling environment are to be used in determining the fragility factor.
Representative fragility factors for various classes of items are listed in table I.

3.9 Hazardous material. A material, substance, or waste that has been determined by the
Secretary of Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and
property when transported in commerce and that has been so designated. (This includes all items
listed as hazardous in Titles 29, 40 and 49 CFR and other applicable modal regulations
effective at the time of shipment.)

3.10 Military packaging. A means of specifying the military preservation and packing
that a given item requires to ensure that it is not degraded during shipment and storage.

a. Military preservation. Application of materials and/or methods designed to protect

an item during shipment, handling, indeterminate storage and distribution to
consignees worldwide.

b. Military packing. Application of any exterior protective methods, materials, or

devices to assure the integrity of the preserved item as follows:

(1) Level A. Protection required to meet the most severe worldwide

shipment, handling, and storage conditions. A Level A pack must, in
tandem with the applied method of preservation, be capable of protecting
material from the effects of direct exposure to extremes of climate, terrain,
and operational and transportation environments. Examples of situations
which indicate a need for use of a Level A pack are: War Reserve
Material, mobilization, strategic and theater deployment and employment,
open storage, deck loading and Foreign Military Sales (as specified in the
contract). Examples of containers used for Level A packing requirements

7
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

include, but are not limited to, overseas type wood boxes, and plastic and
metal reusable containers.

(2) Level B. Protection required to meet moderate worldwide shipment,

handling, and storage conditions. A Level B pack must, in tandem with
the applied preservation, be capable of protecting material not directly
exposed to extremes of climate, terrain, and operational and transportation
environments. Examples of situations which indicate a need for use of a
Level B pack are: security assistance, such as Foreign Military Sales (as
specified in the contract) and containerized overseas shipments. Examples
of containers used for Level B packing requirements include, but are not
limited to, domestic wood crates, weather-resistant fiberboard containers,
fast pack containers, weather-resistant fiber drums, and weather-resistant
paper and multi-wall shipping sacks.

3.11 Packaging design validation. Testing to ascertain the capability of the prototype
pack to protect the integrity and serviceability of the item(s) for which the package is designed.

3.12 Repairable item. An item that, by the application of engineering, economic, and
other factors, could be reasonably restored to a serviceable condition through regular repair
procedures.

3.13 Reusable container. A shipping and storage container that can be reused without
impairment of its protective function and that can be repaired or retrofitted to prolong its life or
modified to adapt it for shipment of items other than that for which it was originally intended.
Reusable shipping and storage containers are further defined as follows:

a. Long life container (100 trips minimum). A shipping container that can be used
repeatedly, and whose service life can be expected to equal the service life of the
item it is designed to protect. These containers may be refurbished by appropriate
maintenance practices to their original condition and subsequently reused.

b. Short life container (10 trips minimum). A shipping container that can be reused
for a limited number of times. The container is usually made of wood, plywood,
fiberboard or similar material that has a limited life.

c. Multiapplication containers. Multiapplication containers are designed to protect a

variety of components within a given fragility and size range. They can be

8
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

manufactured in a similar manner to that used for specialized containers or in

accordance with applicable/specified military or federal specifications. A
multiapplication container can be either of the short-life or long-life variety. Short
life multiapplication containers include "fast packs," consisting of a family of
standard size cushioned fiberboard shipping containers of four types. These types
are fully described in PPP-B-1672 and are identified as Types I, II, III and IV in
table C-IV. Long-life multiapplication reusable containers are designated as Types
VI thru X and are also described in table C-IV. These containers are made of
rugged plastic construction containing internal cushioning pads or permanent shock
mitigation systems (for example, shear mounts, steel coils, and springs) and are
designed to protect repairable components packaged therein, during forward and
retrograde movements within the military supply system.

d. Specialized container. Specialized containers are generally the long-life variety

and are uniquely configured to support and protect a specific item, or limited
variety of items, during handling and storage or to protect personnel and equipment
from hazardous contents. Containers of this type frequently incorporate energy
absorbing systems, temperature control systems or special features to make
handling or shipment possible, easier or safer. Engineering drawings, or
equivalent, are used to define form, fit, function, materials, tolerances and
manufacturing techniques. Internal fixtures and other fitments within specialized
shipping containers result from either original design efforts or the redesign or
modification of an existing container to meet a specific application or need.

3.14 Sealed. An item is considered sealed if the entrances to the interior of the item are
sealed with gaskets or closely mated surfaces under mechanical pressure or are sealed by
threaded closure devices (except plastic caps). Sealed items also include assemblies which are
encapsulated in plastics, ceramics, glass or metal with completely cemented seams or joints
closing the interior to the entrance of liquid water. Hermetic sealing is a seal that will exclude
air and is leakproof at ambient temperatures and atmospheric pressures and is usually glass to
glass, metal to metal or metal to glass.

3.15 Selective group items. Items that cannot appropriately utilize predetermined
packaging developed for common group items (see 3.3) yet do not require a drawing, sketch,
illustration, or separate narrative type instruction to specify packaging details.

3.16 Special group items. Items with peculiar characteristics such as weight,
configuration, complexity, fragility, or other considerations that cannot be classified as common
or selective. An item is considered special if drawings, sketches, illustrations, narrative type
instructions, or specialized containers are required to specify packaging details.

9
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

4. GENERAL MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

4.1 General. Military packaging requirements shall be developed using the figure 1
decision chart in accordance with the requirements of this section, Section 5 and all Appendices
herein. The developed military packaging requirements shall be documented in accordance with
Appendix E and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL) (see 6.3). These
requirements are generally defined by a twelve digit position-sensitive code system, as illustrated
in figure A-1. Appropriate codes are drawn from those listed in Appendix J. When an item has
been determined to be in the special group category, a Special Packaging Instruction shall be
required, prepared in accordance with Appendix E and as specified on the CDRL (see 6.3).

4.1.1 Options. Unless otherwise specified in supplemental instructions (see E.4.2.6), all
military packaging requirements defined or developed herein shall be mandatory for compliance
and no substitutions are permitted. When specified in supplemental instructions (see E.4.2.6),
options can be exercised as to the specific method of preservation or DoD approved packaging
materials to be used. However, the basic preservation method shall be retained, all other
supplemental instructions shall be complied with, and unit package dimensions shall not be
increased by more than one inch. Equal or higher degree of protection shall be afforded the item
and there shall be no increase in the package cost.

4.2 Development of military packaging details and data requirements. If this standard is
cited for use and no specific military packaging details or data requirements are contained in the
contract, the contracting officer shall be contacted for same. Appendix A and other applicable
sections and appendices of this standard shall be used to develop detailed military packaging
requirements in cases where the development of packaging data by the contractor is cited.

4.3 Hazardous material. Packaging for hazardous materials shall be developed in

accordance with the requirements specified in A.4.

4.4 Packaging of classified items. Packaging developed for classified items shall meet
the requirements of DoD 5220.22M, National Industrial Security Program Operating Manual
(NISPOM).

4.5 Quantity per unit pack (QUP). The QUP shall be determined in accordance with
Appendix B.

4.6 Containers. Requirements for containers and their selection for military packaging
applications are specified in Appendix C.

4.7 Kits. Military packaging of parts kits or modification kits shall be in accordance
with Appendix D.

10
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

4.8 Repairable excess and residual parts. Repairable excess and residual part(s) for
which packaging has not been stipulated by the acquisition activity shall be packaged to afford
adequate protection as required to prevent further deterioration due to rust, corrosion, or physical
damage. Unless otherwise specified by the acquisition activity, the QUP shall be one.

4.9 Loose fill materials. Loose fill materials are prohibited in all military packages
except for the packaging of peculiar hazardous materials that require their use for absorptive
purposes.

4.10 Shock and vibration absorption. Shock and vibration absorption shall be provided
by cushioning materials or devices that protect the contents and packaging components from
physical damage during handling, shipment and storage. A cushioning medium shall be placed
as close to the contents as practicable. A noncorrosive wrap shall be placed between the item
and all corrosive type cushioning media.

4.11 Determination of item fragility. Fragility factors in the non-operating state of the
item, established in the item specification, shall be used to establish the maximum energy
permitted to reach the item during transportation and handling (see 3.8). When fragility factors
are not available or established, criteria of table I can be used to approximate G factors. Caution
shall be taken to ensure that there are no additional components installed which lower the item
fragility rating.

4.12 Packaging materials. The use of new packaging materials or products is

encouraged and recommended if their protective capabilities are equivalent to similar approved
materials without increasing the overall cost to the government. To expedite the use of these
materials prior to their inclusion in government specifications, their prompt use will be permitted
under conditions outlined herein. In instances where the material or product is not covered by a
specific specification or standard, the manufacturer or fabricator of the material or product shall
make available documented test data by an approved testing laboratory, that the material or
product meets or exceeds all performance requirements of the specification for a similar material
or product. The request for approval shall be submitted to the acquisition activity via the
technical packaging element of the contract management activity.

5. DETAILED MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

5.1 General military package design considerations. Military packaging shall be of

minimum cost consistent with required performance. Unit packs shall be designed to conserve
weight and cube while retaining the protection required and enhancing standardization.

11
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

5.2 Military preservation. The military preservation procedure should be accomplished

without interruption. When interruptions are unavoidable, temporary wraps, covers or
enclosures shall be provided to insure against contamination or deterioration of the items.

5.2.1 Cleaning and drying. Items shall be cleaned and dried by any process or processes
that are not injurious to the item. All items shall pass the applicable cleaning and drying
inspection requirements of table G-I.

5.2.2 Preservatives.

5.2.2.1 Preservative applicability. When contact preservatives are required to protect an

item from chemical deterioration, they shall conform to table J-III. Preservatives selected shall
be those whose application, use, or removal will not damage the item or impair item function.

5.2.2.2 Application of contact preservatives. Directly after cleaning and drying of the
item, the required preservative shall be uniformly applied by any appropriate procedure that
permits the preservative to coat all necessary surfaces. Suggested methods of application
include, but are not limited to:

a. Dipping

b. Flow coating

c. Slushing

d. Brushing

e. Filling or flushing

f. Fogging

g. Spraying

5.2.2.3 Application and use criteria of volatile corrosion inhibitors (VCI). Volatile
corrosion inhibitor preservative treatment shall be applied in accordance with the criteria and
procedures of MIL-I-8574.

12
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

5.2.3 Methods of military preservation - general requirements. There are five basic
methods of preservation (MOP) established herein:

Method 10 Physical protection

Method 20 Preservative coating only
Method 30 Waterproof protection
Method 40 Watervaporproof protection
Method 50 Watervaporproof protection with desiccant

Various specific techniques, also detailed herein, have been developed to meet the basic
Methods 30, 40, and 50 and shall be used as appropriate. The preservation methods shall be as
specified in the contract or purchase order. In the absence of such requirements, the appropriate
method shall be selected in accordance with the applicable tables of Appendix A. The following
general requirements shall apply:

a. Protection from physical damage and mechanical malfunction is required for all
methods of preservation in addition to the specific environment protection
provided. This requirement shall be validated during conduct of the packaging
design validation tests specified in Appendix F.

b. When methods provide either transparent or opaque protection, transparent

protection may be furnished at the option of the supplier but is not required unless
specifically called for in the contract or purchase order.

c. Protection for all electrostatic discharge sensitive items requires the use of
packaging materials to counteract electrostatic and electromagnetic field forces
(see 5.2.4.1).

d. When specific methods require using a bag or container, preliminary wrapping,

cushioning or other dunnage material shall be applied as necessary to protect the
item, the bag, and the container from all projections or sharp edges of the item as
well as to restrict movement of the item within the unit pack.

e. When methods require chipboard or fiberboard containers within the bag, the
corners and edges of the containers shall be blunted prior to placing the item in
the box and enclosing within the bag.

f. When a transparent unit pack is specified, the preliminary wrapping shall also be
transparent.

13
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

g. Methods of preservation requiring the use of a bag for the interior packaging shall
be subject to the use and fabrication procedures and limitations of MIL-DTL-117.
Table II lists the acceptable materials that may be used in constructing bags that
meet the requirements of these specific methods of preservation (see 6.9). Bags
shall comply with MIL-DTL-6060 when the construction limitations of
MIL-DTL-117 are exceeded.

h. All materials used (e.g. wraps, cushioning, dunnage, and barrier bags) shall be as
clean and dry as practicable to minimize item susceptibility to corrosion and
contaminants.

i. Items with handles, knobs, or other protrusions shall be wrapped or otherwise

protected and secured to facilitate equal distribution of shock forces over the
entire surface of the item and thus prevent damaging shock forces to the
protrusion.

j. When flexible bags are used, the volume of trapped air within the bag shall be
kept to a minimum by compressing the bag around the contents, or by carefully
drawing a vacuum inside the bag, prior to final heat sealing or cold sealing (for
VCI). Caution shall be taken to prevent rupture of the bag, or damage to the item,
due to excessive vacuum.

k. Items preserved with VCI-treated materials are exempted from preliminary

wrapping.

5.2.3.1 Surfaces coated with preservatives. Preliminary wrapping materials in contact

with any item coated with a preservative shall be greaseproof and shall conform to MIL-PRF-
121 or QQ-A-1876. Greaseproof wraps applied solely to confine the contact preservative on
item surfaces are not necessary when a method requires a bag as the preliminary container and
the bag is made of material conforming to MIL-PRF-121, MIL-PRF-131, or MIL-PRF-22191,
type I or II. However, wraps shall not be excluded if necessary to protect the bags from rupture
or perforation.

5.2.3.2 Metal surfaces not coated with preservatives. Only noncorrosive wrapping,
cushioning and dunnage materials meeting the test requirements of MIL-STD-3010, Test
Method 3005, shall be used in contact with metal surfaces of the item. Materials also shall be as
dry and clean as practicable at the time of use.

5.2.3.3 Method 10 - Physical protection. The unpreserved item(s) shall be protected

from physical damage and mechanical malfunction. Cushioning materials, dunnage, blocking
and bracing shall be applied as required to protect the item(s) and the enclosing media and
restrict the movement of the item within the container. The materials selected for all blocking

14
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

and bracing, and the design and application thereof, shall be compatible with the item and its
bearing load limitations. Materials shall be as clean and as dry as practicable. Method 10 packs
shall pass the applicable inspection requirements of table G-I.

5.2.3.4 Method 20 – Physical protection with preservative (with greaseproof wrap, as

required). Items shall be treated with appropriate preservatives in accordance with the
procedures of 5.2.2.2 or 5.2.2.3. Contact preservative coated items shall be wrapped in material
conforming to MIL-PRF-121 or QQ-A-1876. Flexible wraps shall snugly enclose the coated
part or item and be secured to prevent unintentional unwrapping. Parts or items coated with hard
film preservatives conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 1 or 4, may, when dried, be exempted
from wrapping. Projections, sharp edges, or other features of the item, which may damage the
wrap, shall be cushioned as required in accordance with 5.2.3. The type of cushioning and
wrapping material used shall be commensurate with the size, weight and configuration of the
preserved part or item. Method 20 packs shall pass the applicable inspection requirements of
table G-I. When it has been determined to protect items with VCI, they shall be preserved in
accordance with 5.2.4.9.

5.2.3.5 Method 30 - Waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof protection with preservative

as required. Items protected in accordance with Method 30 shall be heat sealed within a
waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof bag. Projections, sharp edges or other physical
characteristics of the item, which may damage the waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof barrier
or container shall be cushioned in accordance with 5.2.3. The item shall also be cushioned as
required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing physical and functional damage to the item.
Unless otherwise specified, preservative coating requirements shall be determined in accordance
with 5.2.2.1. All packs prepared in accordance with any method of this basic group shall pass
the applicable quality assurance tests specified in tables G-I and G-II.

5.2.3.5.1 Method 31 - Waterproof bag, heat sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped and
cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a heat sealed bag conforming to MIL-DTL-
117, Type III, Class B, Style 2. When specified, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall
be provided. (Note: When specified in the contract or order, a carton or box shall be required to
effect the unit container and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or order shall be
placed between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.) When it has been
determined to protect items with VCI, they shall be preserved in accordance with 5.2.4.9.

5.2.3.5.2 Method 32 - Container, waterproof bag, heat sealed. The item, preserved,
wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a close fitting container (box)
selected from table C-I, which in turn shall be enclosed in a heat sealed waterproof bag
conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class B, Style 2, or MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class C,
Style 1. When specified, a protective wrap of heavy duty kraft paper or equivalent material (tape
sealed) shall be provided to protect the barrier material during handling and storage.

15
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

5.2.3.5.3 Method 33 - Greaseproof-waterproof bag, heat sealed. The item, preserved,

wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a close fitting heat sealed bag
conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 1, 2 or 3; or Type III, Class C, Style 1.
When specified in the contract or order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be
provided. (Note: When specified in the contract or order, a carton or box shall be required to
effect the unit container, and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or order shall be
placed between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.) When it has been
determined to protect items with VCI, they shall be preserved in accordance with 5.2.4.9.

5.2.3.6 Method 40 - Watervaporproof protection with preservative as required. Items

protected in accordance with Method 40 shall be heat sealed within a watervaporproof enclosure.
Projections, sharp edges or other physical characteristics of the item, which may damage the
watervaporproof enclosure, shall be cushioned as required in accordance with 5.2.3. The item
shall also be cushioned as required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing physical and functional
damage to the item. Unless otherwise specified, preservative coating requirements shall be
determined in accordance with 5.2.2.1. All packs prepared in accordance with any method of
this basic group shall pass the applicable quality assurance tests specified in tables G-I and G-II.

5.2.3.6.1 Method 41 - Watervaporproof bag, heat sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped
and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a close fitting heat sealed bag
conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, 2 or 3; or Type I, Class F, Style 1; or
Type II, Class E, Style 1. (Note: For electrostatic protection refer to 5.2.4.1.) When specified in
the contract or order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be furnished. (Note: When
specified in the contract or order, a carton or box shall be required to complete the unit container
and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or order shall be placed between the outside
of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)

5.2.3.6.2 Method 42 - Container, watervaporproof bag, heat sealed, container. The item,
preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a close fitting inner
container (box), selected from table C-I, and enclosed in a heat sealed bag conforming to MIL-
DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1; or Type II, Class E, Style 1. Bags in accordance with MIL-
DTL-6060 shall be used when the construction limitations of MIL-DTL-117 are exceeded.
When specified in the contract or order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be
furnished. The sealed bag shall then be enclosed within an appropriate outer container (box),
selected from table C-I or table C-II, unless otherwise specified in the contract or order. When
fiberboard containers are selected or specified for the outer container of this method, they shall
conform to the weather resistant class and grade of ASTM-D5118 or ASTM-D5168 as
applicable. When wood, wood cleated plywood, or wood cleated panelboard is specified as the
outer container of this method, 6 mil polyethylene film conforming to A-A-3174 or equivalent
material shall be used as an overwrap (tape sealed) around the sealed bag to prevent chafing or
rupture by the outer container. When the primary cushioning is located between the sealed bag
and the outer container, this overwrap is not required. Closure, banding, or sealing of the outer

16
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

container shall be performed in accordance with the applicable container specification

procedures or ASTM-D1974, making certain that no damage is inflicted on the bag. (Note:
When the outer container becomes the shipping container, it shall be marked as a shipping
container in accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a unit pack in
accordance with
MIL-STD-129.)

5.2.3.6.3 Method 43 - Floating watervaporproof bag, heat sealed. The item, preserved,
wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6 and anchored or shock mounted as necessary, shall
be enclosed in a heat sealed bag conforming to MIL-DTL-6060. (Note: When the outer
container becomes the shipping container, it shall be marked as a shipping container in
accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a unit pack in accordance with
MIL-STD-129.)

5.2.3.6.4 Method 44 - Rigid container (other than metal), sealed. The item, preserved,
wrapped, and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a sealed, snug fitting, rigid
container other than all metal. Any sealed rigid container other than all metal may be used if the
sealed container provides a watervapor transmission rate (WVTR) not exceeding 0.075 grams
per 100 square inches per 24 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM-D4279.

5.2.3.6.5 Method 45 - Rigid metal container, sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped and
cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be snugly enclosed in a sealed, rigid metal container. Any
selected type of rigid metal container with machine seamed or reusable gasketed closure may be
used. When specified in the contract or purchase order or when dictated by the requirements of
the item, the metal container may be vacuum sealed.

5.2.3.7 Method 50 - Watervaporproof protection with desiccant. Items protected in

accordance with Method 50 shall be heat sealed in a watervaporproof enclosure with activated
desiccant. Unit packs of all of these methods shall also include a humidity indicator.
Projections, sharp edges, or other physical characteristics of the item which may damage the
watervaporproof bag or container shall be cushioned as required in accordance with 5.2.3. The
item shall also be cushioned as required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing physical and
functional damage to the item. Preservative coating requirements shall be determined in
accordance with 5.2.2.1. When bags are used, the bag size shall be of sufficient surface area to
permit two subsequent resealings after item inspection. Unless prohibited in the contract or
order, carrying cases or housings, which function as a sealed container, may also be used as the
watervaporproof enclosure within which the desiccant and humidity indicator will be placed.
Precautions shall be prominently noted on the item cases or housings that the desiccant and
indicator cards shall be removed prior to placing the item into use. Requirements for desiccant
and humidity indicators are as follows:

17
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

a. Desiccant (activated) - The bagged, activated desiccant shall conform to MIL-D-

3464. Type I shall be used unless Type II or III is specified or required because of
special characteristics of the item. Desiccant shall be in standard unit sized bags.
The desiccant shall be strategically located in the pack so as not to be load bearing.
Optimally, it is to be placed in voids of the item or pack interior. Desiccant shall be
adequately secured to prevent its shifting or movement or placed in specially
designed desiccant baskets affixed to the container interior. Under no
circumstances shall desiccant be permitted to come in direct contact with critical
surfaces of the enclosed item. The desiccant shall not be unnecessarily exposed to
the ambient environment when removed from the sealed desiccant storage
container. Removal of the desiccant and its insertion into the unit pack shall be the
last action prior to final sealing of the bag or container.

b. Quantity of desiccant - The minimum quantity of desiccant to be used per unit pack
shall be computed in accordance with either Formula I or II as applicable. The
various values of "X" take into consideration the quality and types of dunnage. The
inner container (when applicable) shall be considered in the dunnage calculations.

Formula I - To find units of desiccant for use within a sealed container other than
rigid all metal:

U = CA + X1D + X2D + X3D + X4D

Formula II - To find units of desiccant for use within a sealed rigid metal container:
U = KV + X1D + X2D + X3D + X4D
Symbols used above are defined as follows:

U = The number of units of desiccant to be used.

C = 0.011 when the area of the barrier material is stated in square inches.

C = 1.6 when the area of the barrier material is stated in square feet.

A = Area of container (barrier) stated in square inches or square feet.

K = 0.0007 when volume is stated in cubic inches.

K = 1.2 when volume is stated in cubic feet.

V = Volume within rigid metal container in cubic inches or cubic feet.

18
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

X1 = 8.0 for cellulosic material, including wood and any other material not noted
below.

X2 = 3.6 for bound fibers (synthetic or vegetable fibers bound with rubber).

X3 = 2.0 for glass fibers (fiberglass).

X4 = 0.5 for synthetic foams and rubber.

D = Pounds of dunnage within the container.

Note: Formula II may also be used to determine the units of desiccant required for
sealed rigid containers other than all metal, when the sealed enclosure provides a
WVTR not exceeding 0.001 grams per 24 hours per 100 square inches, tested in
accordance with ASTM-D4279 using the constant atmosphere method.

c. Humidity indicators. Humidity indicators shall conform to MS20003. The

humidity indicator shall be firmly secured directly behind the inspection window or
immediately within the closure seal of the container. When specified, externally
mounted humidity indicating elements or devices shall be installed in the barrier or
rigid container used to effect the unit pack. Externally mounted color change
humidity indicating devices shall conform to SAE-AS26860.

All packs prepared in accordance with any method of this basic group shall pass the applicable
quality assurance tests of tables G-I and G-II.

5.2.3.7.1 Method 51 - Watervaporproof bag with desiccant, heat sealed. The item,
preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated with humidity indicator as required in 5.2.3.7,
shall be enclosed within a heat sealed bag conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style
1, 2 or 3; Type II, Class E, Style 1, or Type IV, Class E, Style 1. When specified in the contract
or order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be furnished. (Note: When specified in
the contract or order, a carton or box shall be required to complete the unit container, and the
primary cushioning specified in the contract or purchase order shall be placed between the
outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)

5.2.3.7.2 Method 52 - Container, watervaporproof bag with desiccant, heat sealed,

container. The item, preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated with humidity indicator as
required in accordance with 5.2.3.7, shall be enclosed in a close fitting inner container (box)
selected from table C-I. The item and container shall then be enclosed in a heat sealed bag
conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1; or Type II, Class E, Style 1; or Type IV,
Class E, Style 1. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a designated bag, other than
noted herein, shall be furnished. Bags in accordance with MIL-DTL-6060 shall be used when
19
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

the construction limitations of MIL-DTL-117 are exceeded. The sealed bag shall then be
enclosed within an appropriate outer container (box) selected from table C-I or table C-II. When
fiberboard outer containers are used, they shall conform to the weather resistant Class and Grade
of ASTM-D5118 or ASTM-D5168 as applicable. When wood, wood cleated plywood or wood
cleated panelboard boxes are specified as the outer container, a 6 mil polyethylene film
conforming to A-A-3174 shall be used as an overwrap (tape sealed) around the sealed bag to
prevent chafing or rupture by the outer container. When the primary cushioning is located
between the sealed bag and the outer container, this overwrap is not required. Closure sealing or
banding (as applicable) shall be in accordance with the applicable container specification
procedures or ASTM-D1974, making certain that the bag is not damaged. (Note: When the
outer container becomes the shipping container, it shall be marked as a shipping container in
accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a unit pack in accordance with MIL-
STD-129.)

5.2.3.7.3 Method 53 - Floating watervaporproof bag with desiccant, heat sealed. The
item, preserved, wrapped, cushioned, and desiccated with humidity indicator as required in
5.2.3.7 and anchored or shock mounted as necessary, shall be enclosed in a sealed bag
conforming to MIL-DTL-6060. When specified in the contract or order, a window of material
conforming to MIL-PRF-22191, Type I shall be provided in the bag in accordance with MIL-
DTL-6060 procedures for packs 15 cubic feet or larger. When specified, externally mounted
plug type humidity indicators conforming to SAE-AS26860 shall be used. When an exterior
container is to be placed over the floating bag, a removable inspection port shall be provided in
the exterior container body, so situated as to coincide with the location of the inspection window
of the bag or the mounted humidity plug.

5.2.3.7.4 Method 54 - Rigid container (other than metal) with desiccant, sealed. The
item, preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated with humidity indicator as required in
5.2.3.7, shall be enclosed in a sealed, close fitting, rigid container other than all metal. Any
sealed, rigid container other than all metal may be used if the sealed container provides a WVTR
not exceeding 0.075 grams per 100 square inches per 24 hours when tested in accordance with
ASTM-D4279 using the constant atmosphere method.

5.2.3.7.5 Method 55 - Rigid metal container with desiccant, sealed. The item, preserved,
wrapped, cushioned and desiccated with humidity indicator as required in 5.2.3.7, shall be
enclosed in a sealed, close fitting, metal container. Any selected type of rigid metal container
with a machine seamed or welded closure or reusable container with a gasketed or threaded
closure shall be used.

20
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

5.2.4 Military preservation requirements for items with specific characteristics.

5.2.4.1 Electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) items. ESDS items shall be preserved
in accordance with table J-Ia, Code "GX".

5.2.4.2 Items capable of disassembly. Items may be disassembled into component parts
provided an overall saving will result and disassembly and reassembly can be accomplished with
the use of common hand tools by semi-skilled personnel. Each of the disassembled parts shall be
preserved as necessary. Removed parts shall be clearly marked (or match-marked if necessary)
to assure correct reassembly. All fasteners removed during disassembly shall be secured in one
of the mating parts so created.

5.2.4.3 Flexible-coilable items. Flexible, coilable items constructed in a loop, such as

fan belts or door seals, having a 14 inch diameter or greater, shall be looped so as not to distort
or otherwise damage the item. Items shall not be looped if undue strain or damage will occur.
Items that are practical to roll or fold shall be rolled or folded to the minimum cube that prevents
deformation or set to the item during long term storage. When appropriate, coils may be loosely
tied with tape or twist ties to facilitate handling and unpacking.

5.2.4.4 Caging or damping. Items such as instruments or gyroscopes, which incorporate

caging or damping features for securing movable parts in place, shall be properly engaged or
electrically damped prior to packaging.

5.2.4.5 Items with mounts. Equipment containing vibration-shock mounts shall not be
shipped on the mounts unless they are immobilized by blocking or unless the mounts are an
integral internal part of the equipment. In either event, an appropriate cushioning system shall
be provided.

5.2.4.6 Rubber and synthetic rubber items. When rubber or synthetic rubber items are
unit packed in quantities of two or more, the individual pieces shall be dusted with technical
talcum (soapstone) conforming to commercial standards, or separated by kraft or plastic film
separators.

5.2.4.7 Hazardous items. Hazardous items shall be packaged in accordance with table
J-Ia, Code "HM".

5.2.4.8 Moveable parts. Items with moveable external parts that might become damaged
by shock or vibration during shipment shall have these parts secured by blocking, bracing, tie-
downs, disassembly or other techniques.

5.2.4.9 Items compatible with VCI. Prior to preserving items using volatile corrosion
inhibitor materials for Methods of Preservation 20, 31, and 33, compatibility of the item with
VCI shall be considered in accordance with the limitations and restrictions detailed in MIL-I-
21
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

8574. Items are to be cushioned as required. VCI compatible items shall be preserved in
accordance with Method 20 by using VCI treated materials conforming to MIL-PRF-3420 or
MIL-PRF-22019, respectively taped or sealed to form an airtight enclosure, and are exempted
from wrapping (see 5.2.3.4). VCI compatible items preserved in accordance with Methods 31 or
33 protection shall be enclosed in VCI treated bags conforming to MIL-B-22020. Alternately
for Methods 31 or 33, items shall be wrapped in VCI treated materials conforming to MIL-PRF-
3420 and enclosed in the appropriate heat sealed bag corresponding to Method 31 or 33 (see
5.2.3.5.1 and 5.2.3.5.3 respectively).

5.2.4.10 Vacuum sensitive items. When flexible barrier bags are utilized to provide
watervaporproof protection for vacuum sensitive items (e.g., air speed indicators, altimeters,
etc.), special care is to be exercised when minimizing the volume of trapped air within the barrier
bag to assure that negative pressure does not develop inside the bag prior to final closure.

5.3 Level A and B packing requirements.

5.3.1 Intermediate containers. Intermediate containers shall be used under any one of
the following conditions:

a. When they are considered economical because of total quantity on order,

production schedule or when they facilitate handling, storage and reshipment.
b. When the quantity to be shipped to a single destination permits the use of two or
more intermediate containers in an exterior container.
c. When the exterior surface of the unit pack is a bag or wrap of any kind.
d. When specified by the acquisition activity.

5.3.2 Exterior containers. When practicable, the exterior container being shipped to a
single destination shall:

a. Contain items of the same National Stock Number.

b. Contain identical quantities of unit/intermediate packs.
c. Contain items of the same contract.
d. Contain items having the same lot number, cure, manufacture or expiration date.

e. Be the most cost effective and be of minimum cube to contain and protect the
items.
5.3.2.1 Container selection. Acceptable shipping containers for Levels A and B military
packing are listed in table C-II. Selection criteria shall reflect the most economical container
that provides the required protection for any given military packing application.

22
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

5.4 Minimal packing requirements. When anticipated logistics paths indicate that items
requiring military preservation, as outlined in this standard, will not be exposed to shipping
environments more severe than those normally encountered in the commercial distribution
system, military packing requirements need not be implemented. Acceptable minimal packing
requirements for shipments of this nature are listed in table J-IXb.

5.5 Marking. All unit, intermediate and exterior packs shall be marked in accordance
with MIL-STD-129 and additional marking requirements as specified by the acquisition activity.
Interior bags or containers, when enclosed within another container to complete a unit pack (see
table G-I, Notes 1 and 2), shall also be marked as specified for unit pack identification in
MIL-STD-129.

5.6 Military packaging design validation provisions. The contractor shall be required to
perform packaging design validation tests on selective and special group items in accordance
with Appendix F unless one of the following conditions exists:

a. Furnished data - Detailed packaging instructions or design are furnished by the

acquisition activity. This includes the predetermined codes to be used for common
items.

b. Previous test records - The contractor has previous successful test records for the
same item or an item with similar weight, dimensions, fragility, and composition.

c. Approved engineering data - The contractor has engineering data that has been
approved by the cognizant DoD activity and indicates that the proposed packaging
design will successfully meet the requirements of the contract.

d. Multiapplication containers - Items meet the weight, dimensional and fragility

requirements of table C-IV and are packed in the appropriate multiapplication
container.

e. Contractor shipping data - The contractor has historical shipping data confirming
adequate protection was provided to similar items using the same or equivalent
packaging.

5.7 Quality assurance provisions. The contractor is responsible for the performance of
all quality assurance requirements as specified in Appendix G (see 6.4).

23
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

6. NOTES

(This section contains information of a general or explanatory nature that may be helpful, but is
not mandatory.)

6.1 Intended use. Detailed descriptions regarding the intended use of this standard can
be found within 1.1, 1.2, and 6.11.

6.2 Acquisition requirements. Acquisition documents should specify the following:

a. Title, number, revision and date of this standard.

b. Level of packing required (see 5.3 and 5.4).

6.3 Associated Data Item Descriptions (DIDs). This standard has been assigned an
Acquisition Management Systems Control (AMSC) number authorizing it as the source
document for the following DIDs. When it is necessary to obtain the data, the applicable DIDs
must be listed on the Contract Data Requirements List (DD Form 1423).

Reference paragraph DID Number DID title

4.1 DI-PACK-80120 Preservation and Packing Data

4.1 DI-PACK-80121 Special Packing Instructions (SPI)

C.5.1.2/H.3.1 DI-PACK-80683 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS)

Search Request

C.5.1.2/H.3.3.1.1 DI-PACK-80684 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS)

Data Input

F.3.2 DI-PACK-81059 Performance Oriented Packaging (POP) Test

Report

The above DIDs were current as of the date of this standard. The ASSIST database should be
researched at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch/ or http://assist.daps.dla.mil to ensure that
only current and approved DIDs are cited on the DD Form 1423.

24
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

6.4 Testing facilities. The Government contracting activity's invitation for bid (IFB) or
request for quote (RFQ) should include requirements that the bidder/contractor state that he has
the necessary facilities and capabilities of performing all or part of the testing required or that he
will subcontract that which he is unable to perform to an outside packaging concern with the
necessary facilities and identify the specific taskings.

6.5 Subject term (key word) listing.

Cleaning Packaging design validation provisions

Containers Packaging requirements
Drying Preservation
Inspection Preservatives
Marking for shipment Procedural requirements
Methods of preservation Quality assurance
Packaging code development Quantity per unit pack
Packaging data forms Testing

6.6 Copies of regulations. Copies of AFMAN24-204/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB

505/MCO P4030.19/DLAI 4145.3/DCMAD1,CH3.4 are available from the applicable system
program office or the USAF Material Command’s hazardous material bulletin board at
http://www.e-publishing.af.mil.

6.7 Changes from previous issue. Marginal notations are not used in this revision to
identify changes with respect to the previous issue due to the extent of the changes.

6.8 Changes in methods of preservation designations. The following are the current and
superseded MIL-P-116 method of preservation designators:

25
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

Method of Preservation Designators

In MIL-STD-2073-1C, Remarks
In MIL-P-116J
-1D, and 1E
I 20
IA 40
IA-5 45
IA-6 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IA-8 41
IA-13 44
IA-14 42
IA-15 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IA-16 43
IC 30
IC-1 33
IC-2 32
IC-3 31
IC-4 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IC-7 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IC-9 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IC-10 -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
II 50
IIa 53
IIb 52
IIc 51
IId 55
IIe -- Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
IIf 54
III 10

6.9 Conversion of heat sealable bag designators. A conversion table listing the heat
sealable bag designators (and corresponding materials) previously identified in MIL-B-117 and
the updated designators as currently specified in MIL-DTL-117 may be found in table III.

6.10 Supersession. In addition to the document listed on the front cover, this standard
also has superseded the following documents:

MIL-P-116 - Preservation, Methods of.

MIL-P-14232 - Parts, Equipment and Tools for Army Materiel, Packaging of
MIL-STD-726 - Packaging Requirement Codes.
MIL-STD-794 - Parts and Equipment, Procedures for Packaging of.

26
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

MIL-STD-834 - Packaging Data Forms, Instructions for Preparation and Use of.
MIL-STD-1510 - Container Design Retrieval System, Procedures for Use of.
MIL-STD-2073-2 - Packaging Requirement Codes.
MIL-STD-2073 - DoD Materiel, Procedures for Development and Application
of Packaging Requirements.

6.11 Commercial packaging applicability. The following items are to be packaged in

accordance with commercial practice and are not required to meet the requirements of this
standard:

a. Items intended for immediate use;

b. Items for not-mission-capable supply;
c. Items intended for depot operational consumption;
d. Small parcel shipments (CONUS), not-for-stock; and
e. Direct vendor deliveries.

27
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

TABLE I. Approximate fragility factors.

15 G's or less

Some inertial guidance platforms and space vehicles.

16 - 24 G's

Missile guidance systems, precision aligned test equipment, gyros, some inertial guidance
platforms.

25 - 39 G's

Mechanically shock-mounted instruments (shock mounts secured prior to packaging provided

for in-service use only), vacuum tube electronics equipment.

40 – 59 G's

Aircraft accessories such as constant speed drives; electric typewriters, most solid state
electronics equipment, oscilloscopes, computer components.

60 – 84 G's

TV receivers, aircraft accessories such as generators, starters; some solid state electronics
equipment, some circuit cards and some terminal boards.

85 – 110 G's

Refrigerators, appliances, some electromechanical equipment, some circuit cards, air duct hoses,
attenuators, cable assemblies, some capacitors, gears, housings, receivers, couplers, some
resistors, some terminal boards.

110 + G’s

Machinery, aircraft structural parts such as landing gear, control surfaces, hydraulic equipment,
washers, latch pins, plates, screw brackets, bushings, gaskets, cable assemblies, some capacitors,
coupling cover drive discs, fittings, some resistors, rings, rollers, shafts, supports.

28
 TABLE II. Method of preservation vs. appropriate MIL-DTL-117 bag designations and materials.

MIL-DTL-117 Container Bag Material

Method Tbl.
Of J. VII
Type Class Style Specification Type Class Characteristics
Preservation Bag
Code
MIL-PRF-22191 III 1 or 2
31 and 32 III B 2 Waterproof; transparent BL
or A-A-3174 I or II 1
32 and 33 III C 1 MIL-PRF-121 II - Waterproof; greaseproof; opaque BV
II C 1 MIL-PRF-121 I - Waterproof; greaseproof; opaque BE
II C 2 MIL-PRF-22191 II 1 or 2 Waterproof; greaseproof; transparent SD
33
MIL-PRF-121
I - Waterproof; greaseproof; one side opaque,
II C 3 and B2
II 1 or 2 other side transparent
29

MIL-PRF-22191

MIL-STD-2073-1E
I E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 1 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; opaque BS
I E 2 MIL-PRF-22191 I 1 or 2 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; transparent SE
MIL-PRF-131
- 1 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; one side
I E 3 and B3
I 1 or 2 opaque, other side transparent
MIL-PRF-22191
41 and 51
Watervaporproof; electrostatic protective;
I F 1 MIL-PRF-81705 I 1 or 2 electrostatic and electromagnetic shielding; B9
opaque (Method 41 only)
II E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 2 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; opaque SF
IV E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 3 Watervaporproof, greaseproof, opaque SK
I E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 1 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; opaque BS
42 and 52 II E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 2 Watervaporproof; greaseproof; opaque SF
IV E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 3 Watervaporproof, greaseproof, opaque SK
 TABLE III. Heat-sealable bag designator conversion chart.

MIL-B-117G Previous Barrier Material Classification New MIL-DTL-117H New Barrier Material Classification
Type Clas Style Document Type Grad Class Typ Clas Style Document Type Class
I A 2 MIL-B-81705 II - 1 or 2 II A 2 MIL-PRF-81705 II 1 or 2
I B 1 MIL-B-121 I A 1 II C 1 MIL-PRF-121 I -
II B 1 MIL-B-121 II A 1 III C 1 MIL-PRF-121 II -
III B 1 MIL-B-121 II A 1 III C 1 MIL-PRF-121 II -
I B 2 MIL-B-22191 or III - - III B 2 MIL-PRF-22191 or III 1 or 2
L-P-378 I or II A 1 A-A-3174 I or II 1
I B 3 MIL-B-121 and I A 1 DELETED
MIL-B-22191 III - -

MIL-STD-2073-1E
I C 1 MIL-B-121 I A 1 II C 1 MIL-PRF-121 I -
30

II C 1 MIL-B-121 II A 1 III C 1 MIL-PRF-121 II -

I C 2 MIL-B-22191 II - - II C 2 MIL-PRF-22191 II 1 or 2
I C 3 MIL-B-121 and I A 1 II C 3 MIL-PRF-121 and I -
MIL-B-22191 II - - MIL-PRF-22191 II 1 or 2
I E 1 MIL-B-131 I - 1 I E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 1
I E 2 MIL-B-22191 I - - I E 2 MIL-PRF-22191 I 1 or 2
II E 1 MIL-B-131 I - 3 IV E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 3
III E 1 MIL-B-131 I - 2 II E 1 MIL-PRF-131 - 2
I E 3 MIL-B-131 and I - 1 I E 3 MIL-PRF-131 and - 1
MIL-B-22191 I - - MIL-PRF-22191 I 1 or 2
II E 3 MIL-B-131 and I - 3 DELETED
MIL-B-22191 I - -
I F 1 MIL-B-81705 I - 1 or 2 I F 1 MIL-PRF-81705 I 1 or 2
I G 1 MIL-B-131 II - - DELETED
I H 2 MIL-B-81705 III - 1 or 2 II H 2 MIL-PRF-81705 III 1 or 2
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

DEVELOPMENT OF MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

A.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides direction for the development of detailed military
packaging requirements in accordance with the figure 1 decision chart referenced in 4.1.
This appendix also provides information on:

a. use of procedural packaging specifications (see A.3)

b. packaging of hazardous material (see A.4)

c. categorization (see A.5.3) (see tables A-I, A-II, and A-III)

d. selecting preservation methods (see table A-I)

e. development of predetermined packaging codes (see table A-IV)

f. formatting coded data (see table A-IV and figure A-1)

g. computation of weight and cube of packaging materials (see table A-V)

This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is
intended for compliance.

A.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

A.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections A.3
through A.8 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness
of this list, document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements
documents cited in sections A.3 through A.8 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

A.2.2 Government documents.

A.2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards

form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the
issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

31
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PPP-B-140 - Batteries, Storage, Industrial, Automotive, Aircraft

and Navy Portable; Packaging of.
PPP-C-795 - Cushioning Material, Packaging (Flexible Closed
Cell Plastic Film, for Long Distribution Cycles).
PPP-C-2020 - Chemicals, Liquid, Dry, and Paste: Packaging of.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-V-3 - Valves, Fittings, and Flanges (Except for Systems

Indicated Herein); Packaging of.
MIL-DTL-4 - Tires and Inner Tubes; (Non-Aircraft); Packaging of.
MIL-DTL-75 - Electron Tubes, Packaging of.
MIL-S-196 - Support Items, Accessories, and Kits, Mechanical;
Packaging of.
MIL-DTL-197 - Packaging of Bearings, Associated Parts and
Subassemblies.
MIL-DTL-2845 - Propulsion Systems, Boat and Ship; Main Shafting,
Propellers, Bearings, Gauges, Special Tools, and
Associated Repair Parts; Preservation, Packaging,
Packing and Storage of.
MIL-C-3131 - Cordage; Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-3150 - Lubricating Oil, Preservative, Medium.
MIL-M-3184 - Machinery: Deck and Vehicle Mounted With
Associated Equipment and Provisioned (Repair
Parts) Items; Packaging of.
MIL-C-3993 - Copper and Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products;
Packaging of.
MIL-W-5013 - Wheel and Brake Assemblies, Aircraft, General
Specification for.
MIL-P-6063 - Packaging of Batteries, Storage, Charged and Dry
Uncharged and Moist, General Specification for.
MIL-PRF-6081 - Lubricating Oil, Jet Engine.
MIL-PRF-6085 - Lubricating Oil: Instrument, Aircraft, Low
Volatility.
MIL-C-6529 - Corrosion Preventive, Aircraft Engine.

32
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

MIL-PRF-7808 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic

Base.
MIL-PRF-7870 - Lubricating Oil: General Purpose, Low
Temperature.
MIL-W-10430 - Welding Rods and Electrodes; Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-10924 - Grease, Automotive and Artillery.
MIL-C-11796 - Corrosion Preventive Compound, Petrolatum, Hot
Application.
MIL-DTL-12000 - Cable, Cord, and Wire, Electric; Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-16173 - Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback,
Cold-Application.
MIL-E-16298 - Electric Machines Having Rotating Parts,
Accessories and Associated Support Items:
Packaging of.
MIL-P-16789 - Pumps (Including Prime Movers and Support Items);
Packaging of.
MIL-E-17555 - Electronic and Electrical Equipment, Accessories,
and Provisioned Items (Repair Parts); Packaging of.
MIL-DTL-17667 - Paper, Wrapping, Chemically Neutral (Non-
Corrosive).
MIL-DTL-19491 - Semiconductor Devices, Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-21260 - Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine,
Preservative Break-In.
MIL-PRF-23199 - Packaging and Packing Requirements for Special
Purpose Mechanical Components and Repair Parts.
MIL-PRF-23699 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic
Base, NATO Code Number 0-156.
MIL-PRF-23827 - Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, Gear and Actuator
Screw.
MIL-DTL-28786 - Switches, Electrical and Fiber Optic, Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-32033 - Lubricating Oil, General Purpose, Preservative
(Water-Displacing, Low Temperature).
MIL-DTL-39028 - Capacitors, Packaging of.
MIL-DTL-39032 - Resistors, Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-46010 - Lubricant, Solid Film, Heat Cured, Corrosion
Inhibiting.

33
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

MIL-PRF-46170 - Hydraulic Fluid, Rust Inhibited, Fire Resistant,

Synthetic Hydrocarbon Base, NATO Code No. H-
544.
MIL-DTL-55330 - Connectors, Electrical and Fiber Optic, Packaging
of.
MIL-PRF-81322 - Grease, Aircraft, General Purpose, Wide
Temperature Range, NATO Code G-395.
MIL-G-81559 - Gyroscope Assemblies and Attitude and Directional
Reference Instruments for Aircraft; Packaging of.
MIL-PRF-83282 - Hydraulic Fluid, Fire Resistant, Synthetic
Hydrocarbon Base, Metric, NATO Code Number H-
537.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-107 - Preparation and Handling of Industrial Plant

Equipment (IPE) for Shipment and Storage.
MIL-STD-290 - Packaging and Marking of Petroleum and Related
Products.
MIL-STD-758 - Packaging Procedures for Submarine Support Items.

(Copies of these documents are available online at

http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization
Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

A.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following

other Government documents, drawings, and publications form a part of this document to the
extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

JOINT SERVICE REGULATIONS

AFMAN24-204/TM38-250/ - Preparing Hazardous Materials

NAVSUPPUB505/MCOP4030.19/ for Military Air Shipments
DLAI4145.3/DCMAD,CH3.4

(Copies of this document are available online at

www.dscc.dla.mil/downloads/packaging/AFMAN24_204_I.pdf .)

34
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

29 CFR - Labor.
40 CFR - Protection of Environment.
49 CFR - Transportation.

(Application for CFR copies should be addressed to the Superintendent of

Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, North Capital & H Streets, N.W.,
Washington, DC 20402.)

A.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these
documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM-B660 - Standard Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum

and Magnesium Products (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5118/ - Standard Practice for Fabrication of
D5118M Fiberboard Shipping Boxes.

(Copies of these documents are available online at www.astm.org or from ASTM

International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

INTERNATIONAL DOCUMENTS

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)

Dangerous Goods Regulations

(Copies of this document are available online at www.iata.org or from IATA, 800
Place Victoria, PO Box 113, Montreal, Quebec, H4Z 1M1.)

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)

International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code.

(Copies of this document are available online at www.imo.org or from IMO, 4 Albert
Embankment, London, SE1 7SR, United Kingdom.)

35
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

A.3 USE OF EXISTING PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

A.3.1 Application. If adequate military packaging requirements have already been

developed for the item, these requirements shall be used. If these requirements are in the
form of a procedural specification, same shall be documented in accordance with E.4.1.1.
Available procedural packaging specifications are listed by commodity in table A-VI.

A.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

A.4.1 General. Packaging and marking for hazardous material shall comply with
applicable requirements for performance packaging contained in the following documents:

• International Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations

• International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code

• Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title 40 and Title 49

• Joint Service Regulation AFMAN24-204/TM38-250/NAVSUPPUB 505/MCO

P4030.19/ DLAI4145.3/DCMAD,CH3.4 (for military air shipments).

A.4.2 Hazardous material package testing. Testing of hazardous material packaging

shall be conducted as specified in Appendix F.

A.4.3 Hazardous material shipment documentation. All shipments shall be supported

by documentation attesting to the date and the test results obtained from performance
packaging testing. The shipper, if not a self-certifier, shall be responsible for assuring that
third party sources providing performance testing services are, in fact, registered with the
Department of Transportation. The shipper's signed certification that the packaged
configuration meets applicable requirements shall be incorporated on the DD Form 250,
Materiel Inspection and Receiving Report, or other related acceptance document if the DD
Form 250 is not used. All certificates and reports shall be available for inspection by
authorized Government representatives for a period of three years.

A.5 MILITARY PACKAGING CODE DEVELOPMENT

A.5.1 Item classification. All materiel to be packaged can be classified into one of
three groups of items: common, selective, or special.

36
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

a. Common items can be categorized by a specific set of chemical, physical,

and other characteristics for which complete packaging details are
predetermined and are listed in table A-IV using Appendix J coding. These
items are characteristically small, rugged items.

c. Selective items cannot appropriately use predetermined packaging data and

yet do not require a drawing, sketch, illustration, or narrative type instruction
to specify packaging details. These packaging details can be specified by
Appendix J codes, supplemented by in-the-clear information as required.

d. Special items have peculiar characteristics such as weight, configuration,

complexity, fragility, or other considerations that preclude their being grouped
as common or selective. An item is considered special if drawings, sketches,
illustrations, narrative type instructions or a reusable container are required to
specify packaging details.

A.5.2 Item characteristics. Knowledge of the physical and chemical characteristics

and significant features of the item are required to classify items into groups. These
characteristics are item composition, item surface chemistry, criticality of the surface,
functional criticality of the item, item compatibility with preservatives and such physical
factors as size, weight, and fragility. Knowledge of these characteristics leads to the
development of a category code for an item.

A.5.3 Categorization. Tables A-I, A-II, and A-III provide the information for
developing category codes. The category code for common items leads to the predetermined
packaging codes in table A-IV. The category code for selective items indicates that a non-
predetermined packaging code must be established. The category code for special group
items indicates that a Special Packaging Instruction (SPI) or stock numbered reusable
container is required.

A.5.3.1 Category code. The category code is a four-digit code derived from
tables A-I, A-II, and A-III. This code provides a means to concisely define the
characteristics of the item being packaged with respect to the following attributes:

a. First category – The chemical and physical characteristics (tables A-I) of the
item to be considered in the selection of the proper basic method of preservation
(two digits).

37
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

b. Second category – The weight, size and non-operational fragility characteristics

(table A-II) of the item to be considered in the selection of the proper strength
characteristics of a package (one digit).

c. Third category – Preservative requirements (see table A-III) for the item (one
digit).

A.5.3.2 Category code development. Items shall be categorized in the order

indicated in A.5.3.1 by extracting category code digits associated with the item's applicable
characteristics from tables A-I, A-II, and A-III. Categories represent the summation of
pertinent chemical, physical and other characteristics that significantly influence the
packaging required for adequate protection of items. The designation of the appropriate
characteristics of each category, in the sequence as listed, provides four-digit identification
that permits the grouping of various items. These groupings, which may contain items
dissimilar in function, have the same characteristics and therefore require the same method of
preservation. A code "Z” in any of the four positions of the category code will indicate that
the item is selective or special. If no "Zs" appear in the code, then the item is common.

A.5.3.2.1 First category – physical and chemical characteristics. The first category
examines those characteristics that determine the method of preservation needed to afford the
required protection. These are:

a. Item composition/properties.

b. Criticality of item (see 3.6).

c. Compatibility with preservative.

The chemical and physical characteristics of items as applied to table A-I lead to
determination of the first two digits of the category code and the appropriate basic method of
preservation. A code ZZ will indicate the item is selective or special.

A.5.3.2.1.1 Item composition/properties criteria. This determination is made by

physical examination of the item or, if necessary, by researching the design definition of the
item.

38
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

A.5.3.2.1.2 Critical item criteria. Items meeting one or more of the criteria listed in
3.6 shall be considered as having critical surfaces or application as listed in table A-I.

A.5.3.2.1.3 Contact preservative criteria. Items susceptible to deterioration, such as

iron and steel, require preservative unless prohibited by other factors, such as:

a. Preservative application would damage the item.

b. Preservative would be excessively difficult to remove.

c. Presence of any residual preservative would be incompatible with operational

fluids, oils or greases and would potentially cause malfunction during operation.

A.5.3.2.2 Second category – weight/size/fragility. This category establishes

definitive criteria for weight/size/fragility grouping of items. These criteria determine the
required cushioning for the item and, therefore, have direct influence on the container to be
used. It provides a means of separating those items which will permit the use of a bag-type
container from those requiring containers of greater strength or other desired qualities.
Category codes based on weight/size/fragility limitations are found in table A-II. A Code Z
will indicate that the item is selective or special.

A.5.3.2.3 Third category – preservatives. This category establishes applicable

contact preservative codes. The appropriate codes of table A-III will be shown as the third
category. If the required preservative is not listed in the table, assign a "Z" code. A code "Z"
will indicate that the item is either selective or special.

A.5.4 Military packaging code development. Procedures for development of military

packaging codes are detailed in figure A-2.

A.5.4.1 Military packaging codes for common items. If categorization of an item can
be accomplished by a four digit code without using a "Z" code, the item is a "common" item.
The correct packaging for common items has been developed by DoD and is thus
predetermined. This predetermined data is listed in table A-IV and must be used for the
appropriate four digit categorization for all common items. Sequencing format for this
predetermined data is defined in figure A-1.

39
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

A.5.4.2 Military packaging codes for selective items. Specific codes shall be
developed to define packaging for selective items using appropriate tables in Appendix J.
Selection of the proper codes shall be based on the unique protection required for each item.
The sequence for developed packaging codes for selective items is also defined in figure A-1.
Supplemental data may be required to completely define the packaging.

When the options provided in the Method of Preservation description must be definitized,
appropriate specific codes of Appendix J shall be used.

A.5.5 Recording of developed packaging data. Developed military packaging codes

shall be recorded in accordance with the requirements contained in E.4.2.

A.6 CONTAINER SELECTION. Acceptable containers and their selection criteria are
detailed in Appendix C.

A.7 FORMULAS. Table A-V contains formulas for calculating the weight and sizes of
barrier materials, containers, wraps and cushioning.

A.8 PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION.

A.8.1 Common items. Packaging design validation tests are not required for
common items.

A.8.2 Selective and special items. See 5.6 for requirements.

40
 DIGIT POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CORRESPONDING J-I
TABLES IN & J-II J-III J-IV J-V J-VI J-VII
APPENDIX J J-Ia

UNIT CONTAINER

WRAPPING MATERIAL

CLEANING PROCEDURE
SEE TABLES IN

CUSHIONING THICKNESS

PRESERVATIVE MATERIAL
APPENDIX J

METHOD OF PRESERVATION
CUSHIONING AND DUNNAGE
42 1 0/0/ EA LC C ED

41
EXAMPLE:
METHOD 42 ASTM-D5118,
APPENDIX A

TYPE CF; CLASS

MIL-STD-2073-1E

ANY APPLICABLE WEATHER-

PROCESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH RESISTANT,
5.2.1 CORRUGATED
FIBERBOARD
NO REQUIREMENT BOX

MIL-DTL-17667, CHEMICALLY NEUTRAL WRAPPING PAPER

FIGURE A-1. Format for interpretation of packaging code sequence.

PPP-C-795, CLASS 1, CELLULAR PLASTIC FILM CUSHIONING ¾ IN CUSHIONING
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

DEVELOP 4-DIGIT
Category Code
(see A.5.3.2)

Does Category Code

contain a "Z"?

NO YES

COMMON ITEM: Can packaging be defined

Use Predetermined by Appendix J codes and
Code from table supplemental data?
A-IV.

YES NO

SELECTIVE ITEM: SPECIAL ITEM:

Develop packaging code in Develop SPI to define
construction sequence using package per E.5
Appendix J codes
and supplemental data
as req'd per E.4.2.6

Figure A-2. Military packaging data development flow chart.

42
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination.

BARE METAL ITEMS

1st and
Does Item Basic
Is a Contact 2nd Digit
Item Composition/Properties Have Critical Method of
Preservative of
(See Note 1) Surfaces or Preservation
Allowable? Category
Application? (See Note 2)
Code
Iron, steel (bare or black oxide Yes No 0/1 20
coated); includes all stainless var- Yes Yes 0/3 40
ieties except those having min- No No 0/5 30
imum compositions of 17Cr-7Ni No Yes 0/7 50
Yes No 0/9 30
Magnesium (bare or chromated) No Yes 11 50
No No 13 40
Aluminum, Babbitt, beryllium, 10/See
No No 15
brass, bronze, cadmium, cobalt, Note 3
copper, copper alloys, lead, Monel, No Yes 16 30
nickel, rough castings, silver,
sintered alloys, stainless steel, Yes Yes 18 20
titanium, tin, zinc
No Yes 20/ 50
Ferrous and non-ferrous combined
Yes No 21 30
None of above ZZ

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified, when the material described in the Item
Composition/Properties column is combined with a non-metallic material, package to the
requirement of the metal present, contact preservative prohibited, and use the appropriate
metal category code.
Note 2: Specific techniques to accomplish these basic methods are available and may be used as
appropriate, except for the predetermined codes for common items which are defined in
table A-IV.
Note 3: If combined with a non-metallic material, package to the requirement of the non-metal
present and use the corresponding non-metal category code.
Note 4: Any functional lubricant not requiring removal may be applied to the unsealed equipment.
Note 5: Package to protect item against EMI and ESD damage (not a common item).

43
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.

PLATED OR COATED ITEMS

Does Item 1st and 2nd Basic

Item Composition/Properties Is a Contact Have Critical Digit of Method of
(See Note 1) Preservative Surfaces or Category Preservation
Allowable? Application? Code (See Note 2)

Ferrous metals fully plated with No Yes 22 30

chromium, copper, nickel, silver, 10/See
No No 24
tin, gold, iridium, osmium, Note 3
palladium, rhodium, ruthenium,
Yes Yes 25 20
zinc, cadmium or terne
10/See
No No 27
Non-ferrous metals that have been Note 3
plated No Yes 28 30
Yes Yes 30/ 20
Iron or steel which has a phosphate 30/See
No No 32
coating, copper or brass which has Note 3
chromate or black oxide finish over No Yes 33 30
entire surface Yes Yes 35 20
Anodized aluminum; zinc or zinc- 10/See
No No 37
plated iron or steel; zinc alloy Note 3
castings; alclad aluminum No Yes 38 30
Anodized aluminum combined with
No No 40/ 10
passivated corrosion resistant steel
Metals that are painted, varnished, 10/See
No No 41
lacquered or enameled Note 3
Porous metal, oil impregnated No No 42 30
None of above or procedural
ZZ
packaging specification applies

44
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.

NONMETALS

1st and
Does Item Basic
Is a Contact 2nd Digit
Item Composition/Properties Have Critical Method of
Preservative of
(See Note 1) Surfaces or Preservation
Allowable? Category
Application? (See Note 2)
Code
No No 43 10
Plastics or plastic-fiber composites
No Yes 44 30
Natural or synthetic rubber No Yes 45 30
No No 46 30
No No 47 10
Leather
No Yes 48 30
Optical glass, quartz, mica and
assemblies using these as component No Yes 49 40
parts
Carbon, graphite, asbestos, ceramics No No 50/ 10
and glass (other than optical) No Yes 51 30
No No 52 30
Paper
No Yes 53 30
No No 54 10
Wood or cork
No Yes 55 30
Cordage and items made of cloth No No 56 10
(includes shelf-life clothing) No Yes 57 30
Textiles No Yes 58 30
None of above or procedural
ZZ
packaging specification applies

45
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.

COMPLETE ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENTS, RADIO AND RADAR SETS,

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES, OTHER COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

1st and
Does Item Basic
Is a Contact 2nd Digit
Item Composition/Properties Have Critical Method of
Preservative of
(See Note 1) Surfaces or Preservation
Allowable? Category
Application? (See Note 2)
Code
Assembly may contain any material
and is sealed; external surfaces need
No No 60 10
no further protection against
corrosion
Assembly may contain any material
and is sealed; external surfaces need Yes No 61 40
protection against corrosion
Assembly may contain any material
Yes No 62 50
and is not sealed.
None of above or procedural
ZZ
packaging specification applies

46
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.

RADIO AND RADAR, OTHER COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT, ELECTRONIC

ASSEMBLIES, SUBASSEMBLIES AND COMPONENT PARTS (NOT SEALED)

1st and
Does Item Basic
Is a Contact 2nd Digit
Item Composition/Properties Have Critical Method of
Preservative of
(See Note 1) Surfaces or Preservation
Allowable? Category
Application? (See Note 2)
Code
No No 64 40
Steel, iron and magnesium 50/See
No Yes 65
Note 4
Electrical nonmetallic combination
Yes No 67 30
with gold plating
Optical glass, quarts and mica No No 68 30
(includes plug type electronic
connectors, resistors, capacitors, No Yes 69 40
etc.)
Electrostatic discharge, electro-
40/See
magnetic, magnetic or radioactivity No No ZZ
Note 5
sensitive devices or parts
Copper, bronze, brass, beryllium No Yes 72 40
Gold, silver, platinum and iridium
No No 73 40
and other precious metals
Parts move on bearings (any
No Yes 74 50
material)
None of above or procedural
ZZ
packaging specification applies

47
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.

ELECTRICAL-MECHANICAL ASSEMBLIES

1st and
Does Item Basic
Is a Contact 2nd Digit
Item Composition/Properties Have Critical Method of
Preservative of
(See Note 1) Surfaces or Preservation
Allowable? Category
Application? (See Note 2)
Code
Bare steel, iron, or magnesium; parts
No No 77 50
electrically balanced or calibrated
No No 80 40
End product may contain any Yes Yes 81 40
material (not sealed) 50/See
No Yes 83
Note 4
End product may contain any Yes Yes 84 30
material (sealed) No No 85 10
None of above or procedural
ZZ
packaging specification applies

48
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-II. Weight/size/and non-operational fragility category code determination.

Cate-
Degree of
Item weight and dimensions gory
Fragility
Code
2.0 lbs or less; one dimension 2 inches or less, other dimensions
Above 110 G's A
not greater than 24 inches (see Note 1)
2.0 lbs or less; all dimensions over 2 inches but not greater than 24
Above 110 G’s B
inches (see Note 2)
Over 2.0 lbs to 5.0 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches Above 110 G's C
Over 5.0 lbs to 7.5 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches Above 110 G's D
Over 7.5 lbs to 10.0 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches Above 110 G's E
0.25 lbs or less; one dimension 2 inches or less, other dimensions
85 to 110 G's F
not greater than 24 inches
Over 0.25 lbs to 2.0 lbs; one dimension 2 inches or less, other
85 to 110 G's G
dimensions not greater than 24 inches
2.0 lbs or less; all dimensions over 2 inches, but not greater than
85 to 110 G's H
24 inches
Over 2.0 lbs to 5.0 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches 85 to 110 G's J
Over 5.0 lbs to 7.5 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches 85 to 110 G's K
Over 7.5 lbs to 10.0 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches 85 to 110 G's L
Any degree of
Over 10.0 lbs regardless of dimensions Z
fragility
Any degree of
Any weight and one dimension greater than 24 inches Z
fragility
Any weight, any dimensions Less than 85 G's Z

Note 1. Items that have irregularities or protrusions which require cushioning to protect the
package shall be coded F or G.
Note 2. Items that have irregularities or protrusions which require cushioning to protect the
package shall be coded H.

49
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-III. Contact preservative category code determination.

Preserva- Corres-
Cate-
tive Grade, Type ponding
Description Uses gory
Specifi- or Class Appendix
Code
cation J Code
MIL-PRF- Grade 1, Asphalt compound Protect noncritical A 0/1
16173 Hard Film dissolved in metal items in outdoor
petroleum solvent; storage; used on bolts,
dries to hard film chains and similar
in 4 hours items
MIL-PRF- Grade 2, Amber colored Extended under cover B 0/2
16173 Soft Film compound diluted protection to exterior
in solvent; dries surfaces of machinery,
soft; mixes with bearings and
oil; applied cold instruments; used
outdoors for limited
periods only
MIL-C- Class 3, Soft Petrolatum base Bearing preservation; C 0/6
11796 Film corrosion machined surfaces that
preventive; dries are brushable
soft and greasy
MIL-PRF- One grade Light, low Small arms and D 0/9
32033 only viscosity oil automatic weapons
containing rust protection;
inhibitors components of internal
combustion engines
MIL-PRF- Type I, Light, medium or Reciprocating spark- E 10/
21260 Grades 10, heavy viscosity oil ignition and
30 or 50 with additives compression-ignition
engines preservation;
also all types of ground
equipment; oils are
operational and need
not be drained

50
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-III. Contact preservative category code determination – Continued.

Preserva- Corres-
Cate-
tive Grade, Type ponding
Description Uses gory
Specifi- or Class Appendix
Code
cation J Code
MIL-PRF- One grade Smooth Ball, roller and needle F 11
23827 only homogenous mix- bearings, gears,
gelling agent electronic items and
aircraft control systems
MIL-PRF- One type Synthetic based Operating lubricating G 33
7808 only lubricating oil oil for aircraft turbine
engines, helicopter
transmissions and
accessory equipment
MIL-PRF- Type I Synthetic hydro- Intended for use in H 15
46170 carbon base tank recoil mechanism
hydraulic fluids and hydraulic systems
MIL-PRF- One grade Synthetic oil with Aircraft instruments I 17
6085 only additives for anti- and electronic
oxidation and equipment
corrosion
protection
MIL-PRF- One grade Wide temperature Operating lubricant for J 12
81322 only range liquid aircraft related
lubricant (grease) equipment
MIL-PRF- Grade 4, Solvent dispersed, General purpose K 19
16173 transparent amber colored, indoor and limited
film non-tacky film outdoor protection
where transparency is
desired

51
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-III. Contact preservative category code determination – Continued.

Preserva- Corres-
Cate-
tive Grade, Type ponding
Description Uses gory
Specifi- or Class Appendix
Code
cation J Code
MIL-PRF- One grade Hydraulic fluid, Intended for use from L 65
83282 only fire resistant, -40° to +205°C in
synthetic hydro- automatic pilots, shock
carbon base absorbers, air
compressor gear
boxes, brakes, flap-
control mechanisms,
missile hydraulic
servo-controlled
systems and other
hydraulic systems
using synthetic sealing
material
MIL-PRF- One grade Clear transparent General purpose M 50/
7870 only lubricating oil
suitable for low
temperature
operations
MIL-PRF- Grade 3, Solvent dispersed Used where fresh or N 0/3
16173 Water compound that salt water displacing is
Displacing, deposits a thin required; interior
Soft Film non-drying film machinery surfaces or
that displaces material under cover
water

MIL-PRF- One grade Highly refined Lubricating and P 0/7

3150 only lubricating oil with preserving internal
corrosion inhibitor surfaces of machine
added assemblies (except
combustion engines);
also for small arms and
artillery

52
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-III. Contact preservative category code determination – Continued.

Preserva- Corres-
Cate-
tive Grade, Type ponding
Description Uses gory
Specifi- or Class Appendix
Code
cation J Code
MIL-C- Type II Ready mixed For preserving Q 31
6529 material for reciprocating engines
reciprocating and equipment
engines
MIL-C- Type III Ready mixed For preserving turbojet R 32
6529 material for jet engines
aircraft engines
--- --- Vendor’s ---- S 49
protective grease
or oil coating
MIL-PRF- Type I or II Solid film Intended for use on T 30/
46010 lubricant intended aluminum, aluminum
to reduce wear and alloys, copper and
prevent galling, copper alloys, steel and
corrosion and stainless steel, titanium
seizure of and chromium and
materials nickel bearing surfaces
MIL-PRF- Grade 1010 Refined petroleum Used whenever jet U 51
6081 product containing engine oil is required
oxidation and for the
inhibitors and pour preservation of
point depressants interiors of fuel cells
and fuel systems
--- --- Preserve with --- W 89
normal operating
lubricant

53
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-III. Contact preservative category code determination - Continued.

Preserva- Corres-
Cate-
tive Grade, Type ponding
Description Uses gory
Specifi- or Class Appendix
Code
cation J Code
Special --- --- --- Z Appro-
require- priate
ment preser-
vative
material
code from
Appendix
J
No require- --- --- --- 0/ 0/0/
ment

54
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items.

Category Codes
Chemical and physical
Weight/size/fragility Contact Preservative Packaging code
characteristics (from
(from table A-II) (from table A-III)
table A-I)

METHOD 10

15,24,27,37,40/,41,43, A 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/0/0/0/A1
47,50/,54,56,60/, or 85 B 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/0/0/0/ED
C 0/ 10l10/0/0/0/NAAED
D 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NABED
E 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NACED
F 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NAAA1
G 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NABA1
H 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NABED
J 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NACED
K 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NADED
L 0/ 10/10/0/0/0/NAFED

METHOD 20

0/1,18,25,30/, or 35 A * 20/1**GH0/0/0/BD
B * 20/1**GH0/0/0/ED
C * 20/1**GHNAAED
D * 20/1**GHNABED
E * 20/1**GHNACED
F * 20/1**GHNAABD
G * 20/1**GHNABBD
H * 20/1**GHNABED
J * 20/1**GHNACED
K * 20/1**GHNADED
L * 20/1**GHNAFED

* = Category code for applicable preservative.

** = Applicable preservative code from table J-III.

55
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items - Continued.

Category Codes
Chemical and physical
Weight/size/fragility Contact Preservative Packaging code
characteristics (from
(from table A-II) (from table A-III)
table A-I)

METHOD 30 (WITHOUT PRESERVATIVE)

0/5,16,22,28,32,33,38, A 0/ 3110/0/0/0/0/0/0/BL
42,44,45,46,48,51,52, B 0/ 3210/0/0/0/0/0/0/BL
53,55,57,58, or 68 C 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NAABL
D 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NABBL
E 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NACBL
F 0/ 3110/0/0/0/NAABL
G 0/ 3110/0/0/0/NABBL
H 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NABBL
J 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NACBL
K 0/ 3210/0/0/0/NADBL
L 0/ 3210/0/0/0lNAFBL

METHOD 30 (WITH PRESERVATIVE)

0/9,21,67, or 84 A * 331**GH0/0/0/BE
B * 321**GH0/0/0/BE
C * 321**GHNAABE
D * 321**GHNABBE
E * 321**GHNACBE
F * 331**GHNAABE
G * 331**GHNABBE
H * 321**GHNABBE
J * 321**GHNACBE
K * 321**GHNADBE
L * 321**GHNAFBE

* = Category code for applicable preservative.

** = Applicable preservative code from table J-III.

56
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items - Continued.

Category Codes
Chemical and physical
Weight/size/fragility Contact Preservative Packaging code
characteristics (from
(from table A-II) (from table A-III)
table A-I)

METHOD 40 (WITHOUT PRESERVATIVE)

13,49,64,69,72,73, or A 0/ 4110/0/0/0/0/0/0/BS
80/ B 0/ 4210/0/0/0/0/0/0/BS
C 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NAABS
D 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NABBS
E 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NACBS
F 0/ 4110/0/0/0/NAABS
G 0/ 4110/0/0/0/NABBS
H 0/ 4210/0/0l0/NABBS
J 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NACBS
K 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NADBS
L 0/ 4210/0/0/0/NAFBS

METHOD 40 (WITH PRESERVATIVE)

0/3,61, or 81 A * 411**GH0/0/0/BS
B * 421**GH0/0/0/BS
C * 421**GHNAABS
D * 421**GHNABBS
E * 421**GHNACBS
F * 411**GHNAABS
G * 411**GHNABBS
H * 421**GHNABBS
J * 421**GHNACBS
K * 421**GHNADBS
L * 421**GHNAFBS

* = Category code for applicable preservative.

** = Applicable preservative code from table J-III.

57
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items - Continued.

Category Codes
Chemical and physical
Weight/size/fragility Contact Preservative Packaging code
characteristics (from
(from table A-II) (from table A-III)
table A-I)

METHOD 50 (WITHOUT PRESERVATIVE)

0/7,11,20/,65,74,77, or A 0/ 5110/0/0/0/0/0/0/BS
83 B 0/ 5210/0/0/0/0/0/0/BS
C 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NAABS
D 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NABBS
E 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NACBS
F 0/ 5110/0/0/0/NAABS
G 0/ 5110/0/0/0/NABBS
H 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NABBS
J 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NACBS
K 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NADBS
L 0/ 5210/0/0/0/NAFBS

METHOD 50 (WITH PRESERVATIVE)

62 A * 511**GH0/0/0/BS
B * 521**GH0/0/0/BS
C * 521**GHNAABS
D * 521**GHNABBS
E * 521**GHNACBS
F * 511**GHNAABS
G * 511**GHNABBS
H * 521**GHNABBS
J * 521**GHNACBS
K * 521**GHNADBS
L * 521**GHNAFBS

* = Category code for applicable preservative.

** = Applicable preservative code from table J-III.

58
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-V. Calculation of material sizes and weights.

Material Property Computation

Wraps Size Length = 2 x Item Width + 2 x Item Ht. + 2"
Width = Item Length + Item Ht. + 1.5"

Weight Weight = Length x Width x Wrap Weight

Factor in lbs/in.2
Roll Cushioning* Size Length = (2 x Item Width + 2 x Item Ht. +
1") x No. of Thickness Required
Width = Item Length + Item Ht. + 1"

Weight Weight = Length x Width x Cushion

Thickness x Cushion Density in lbs/cu. in.
Cut Cushioning* Size

Bottom & Top Pads Length = Item Length

Width = Item Width + 2 x Cushion
Thickness

End Pads Length = Item Width + 2 x Cushion

Thickness
Width = Item Height + 2 x Cushion
Thickness

Side Pads Length = Item Length

Width = Item Height

Weight Weight = 2 (Area of Bottom Pad + Area of

End Pad + Area of Side Pad) x Cushion
Thickness x Cushion Density in lbs/cu. in.

* Item dimensions must include all wraps, dunnage and containers already applied to the item.

59
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-V. Calculation of material sizes and weights – Continued.

Material Property Computation

Fiberboard Containers Size

Inside Dimensions Length = Item Length + 2 x Cushion

Thickness
Width = Item Width + 2 x Cushion
Thickness
Height = Item Height + 2 x Cushion
Thickness

Outside Dimensions Add twice the thickness of the fiberboard to

each inside dimension
Flexible Barriers Size

Methods 30 and 40 Length = 2 x Item Width + 2 x Item Height

+ 3"
Width = Item Length + Item Height + 3"

Method 50 Length = 2 x Item Width + 2 x Item Height

+ 5"
Width = Item Length + Item Height + 5"

EXCEPTIONS: Minimum size of bag shall be 2-1/2 x 3 inches

regardless of calculations; calculated widths shall be
extended to the next inch except for the minimum
size bag; bag sizes may be adjusted to accommodate
packaging equipment when required.

Note: All size calculations are in inches and all weights are in pounds.

60
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX A

TABLE A-VI. Procedural packaging specifications.

Commodity Specification

Aluminum ASTM-B660
Batteries, storage, general MIL-P-6063
Batteries, storage, industrial and lead acid PPP-B-140
Bearings MIL-DTL-197
Cable, electric MIL-DTL-12000
Capacitors MIL-DTL-39028
Chemicals PPP-C-2020
Connectors MIL-DTL-55330
Copper MIL-C-3993
Cordage MIL-C-3131
Electric machines MIL-E-16298
Electron tubes MIL-DTL-75
Electronic equipment MIL-E-17555
Engine repair parts MIL-S-196
Fittings and flanges MIL-V-3
Gyroscopes MIL-G-81559
Industrial Plant Equipment MIL-STD-107
Machinery, deck and vehicle mounted MIL-M-3184
Magnesium ASTM-B660
Petroleum products MIL-STD-290
Propellers, ship MIL-DTL-2845
Pumps MIL-P-16789
Resistors MIL-DTL-39032
Semiconductors MIL-DTL-19491
Special purpose components and repair parts MIL-PRF-23199
Submarine repair parts MIL-STD-758
Support items MIL-S-196
Switches MIL-DTL-28786
Tires and tubes MIL-DTL-4
Valves MIL-V-3
Welding rods MIL-W-10430
Wheel and brake assemblies, aircraft MIL-W-5013
Wire, electric MIL-DTL-12000

61
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

62
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

FACTORS AND FORMULAE ESTABLISHING MILITARY PACKAGING QUP AND ICQ

B.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides the methods to determine the quantity per unit pack (QUP)
and intermediate container quantity (ICQ) for other than hazardous materials, when same is not
specified. QUPs will be developed in consonance with existing instructions for establishment of
Unit of Issue information. QUP for hazardous material shall be determined after consideration
of the user's needs and the most restrictive modal regulation anticipated. This appendix is a
mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance as
applicable.

B.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

This section is not applicable to this appendix.

B.3 DETERMINATION OF QUP

B.3.1 Repairable items (depot or field level) or items designated Hi-value or Hi-priority.
A QUP of one will be established for all items identified as repairable (depot or field level) or
items designated Hi-value or Hi-priority.

B.3.2 Consumable items.

a. QUP shall be one for all consumable items with a unit cost of $50.00 or more.

b. Items of less than $50.00 unit cost may be assigned a QUP of greater than one (1)
when the computation utilizing Formula A or B (see B.3.8) so indicates. However,
the maximum dollar value of the QUP shall not exceed $200.00 for parts applicable
to more than one assembly or $100.00 for parts applicable to only one assembly.

B.3.3 Irregular configuration, delicate or fragile items. The QUP for items of irregular
configuration, delicate or fragile nature, not lending themselves to multiple packs, is one each.

B.3.4 Pairs and sets items. The QUP for items which are furnished in pairs, sets, etc., is
one pair, one set, etc., as applicable.

B.3.5 Items unit packed in accordance with Method 50. The QUP for items which are
unit packed in accordance with Method 50 shall be one.

63
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

B.3.6 Kit. A kit will be indicated one each, regardless of the quantity of items contained
therein.

B.3.7 Lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope. The factors and formulae contained
herein are not applicable to lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope.

B.3.8 Factors and formulae establishing QUP. The following factors and formulae
should be used in determining the quantity per unit pack (QUP).

B.3.8.1 Consumable items having both maintenance and overhaul applications. Formula
A (see B.4.1) shall be used to determine the QUP as follows:

a. Determine item unit cost.

b. Sum the factors in the appropriate cost column for Groups I through IV.

c. Determine whether item is applicable to more than one end assembly or applicable to
only one end assembly. The QUP will be the number in the appropriate column
opposite the above-determined sum of factors.

d. The QUP for consumer items, office supplies, clothing, commercial hardware, and
similar items can be modified as necessary to assure uniformity and compatibility
with standard commercial packaging.

e. Delicate or fragile peculiar parts costing $2.50 or less and lending themselves to
multiple packs, with a final sum of factors score of five or more and similar common
parts with a final sum of factors score of four or more will be afforded the next lesser
QUP rather than that normally specified.

f. In determining QUP for those items for which actual replacement factors are not
available, estimated factors will be used, and the appropriate numerical rate
assigned.

B.3.8.2 Consumable items having overhaul applications only. Formula B (see B.4.2)
shall be used to determine the QUP as follows:

a. Determine quantity required per end assembly.

b. Sum the factors in the appropriate column for Groups I through IV.

64
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

c. Determine whether item is applicable to more than one end assembly or applicable to
only one end assembly. The QUP will be the number in the appropriate column
opposite the above-determined sum of factors.

d. In determining QUP for those items for which actual replacement factors are not
available, estimated factors will be used, and the appropriate numerical rate
assigned.

65
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

B.4 QUANTITY PER UNIT PACK DETERMINATION FORMULAE

B.4.1 Formula A - (For consumable items having both maintenance & overhaul
Applications.)

Cost per item in dollars

.01 .51 4.01 10.01 20.01 35.01
to to to to to to
.50 4.00 10.00 20.00 35.00 50.00
GROUP I -
Cost factor +4 +3 +2 +1 0 -2
GROUP II -
Weight & cube factor
0 to 0.01 cu ft. and +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2
0 to 0.19 lb.
0.02 to 1.00 cu ft. and +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
0.20 to 1.00 lb.
1.01 to 2.00 cu ft. and 0 0 0 0 0 0
1.01 to 2.00 lb.
2.01 to 3.00 cu ft. and -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
2.01 to 5.00 lb.
Items exceeding 3.00 cu ft. or 5.00 lb. will be packaged in QUP of one each.
GROUP III –
Replacement factor (see B.3.8.1.f)
1% thru 20% -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2
21% thru 50% -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
51% or more 0 0 0 0 0 0
GROUP IV -
Method of preservation factor
Methods 10 and 20 0 0 0 0 0 0
Methods 30 and 40 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2

QUP for parts applicable to more QUP for parts applicable to

Sum of Factors than one assembly (see B.3.8.1.c) only one assembly

0 or less 1 1
1 5 1
2 10 5
3 10 5
4 25 (see B.3.8.1.e) 10
5 50 (see B.3.8.1.e) 25
6 50 (see B.3.8.1.e) 50

66
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

B.4.2 Formula B - (For consumable items having overhaul applications only.)

Quantity required per end assembly

8 or Over 5 to 7 3 to 4 1 to 2
GROUP I – Quantity required per assembly factor +6 +5 +4 +2

GROUP II – Weight & cube factor rates

0 to 0.01 cu ft. & +2 +2 +2 +2
0 to .19 lb.
0.02 to 1.00 cu ft. & +1 +1 +1 +1
0.20 to 1.00 lb
1.01 to 2.00 cu ft. & -5 -4 -4 -2
1.01 to 2.00 lb
2.01 to 3.00 cu ft. & -6 -5 -5 -3
2.01 to 5.00 lb
Items exceeding 3.00 cu ft. or 5.00 lb. will be packed in QUP of one each.
GROUP III – Replacement factor (see B.3.8.2.d)
1% thru 5% -4 -4 -4 -4
6% thru 20% -3 -3 -3 -3
21% thru 40% -2 -2 -2 -2
41% thru 75% 0 0 0 0
76% thru 100% +1 +1 +1 +1
GROUP IV – Method of preservation factor
Methods 10 and 20 0 0 0 0
Methods 30 and 40 -2 -2 -2 -2

QUP for parts applicable to more QUP for parts applicable to

Sum of Factors than one assembly (see B.3.8.2.c) only one assembly

0 or less 1 1
1 5 1
2 10 5
3 10 5
4 25 10
5 50 25
6 50 50
7 100 50
8 200 100*
9 500

*Use QUP of 100 each only in instances where more than 100 each of an item is required per end assembly or is
required for multiuse in a shop function where 100 each or more may be consumed at one location in a reasonable
amount of time.

67
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

B.5 DETERMINATION OF ICQ

B.5.1 Quantities per intermediate container. Except as otherwise specified herein or

specified by the contract, unit packs requiring intermediate packing shall be packed in quantities
governed by the following:

a. Maximum of 100 unit packs to the intermediate container.

b. Maximum net load of 40 pounds.

c. Maximum size of 1.5 cubic feet with at least two dimensions not exceeding 16
inches.

Table B-I offers a guide to the quantity of unit packs that could be placed in the intermediate
container based on the above criteria.

B.5.2 Intermediate container limitations. Quantities of unit packs prescribed may be

varied under any one of the following conditions:

a. When the quantity to be shipped to a single destination is less than the established
intermediate quantity, the total quantity shall be placed in a shipping container of a
minimum size to contain the unit packs.

b. When a contract or order specifies a total quantity that is more than the established
intermediate quantity, but not in multiples thereof, established quantities shall be
packed in the required number of intermediate containers, and the remaining quantity
shall be placed in the smallest container which will accommodate the remaining unit
packs.

68
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX B

TABLE B-I. Guidance for establishing number of unit packs per

intermediate container (see Notes 1, 2 and 3).

Unit packs Unit pack weight Unit pack cube

per int. container (lbs) (cu. ft.)
100 .4 .0150
96 .41 .0156
92 .43 .0163
88 .46 .0170
84 .47 .0178
80 .5 .0187
76 .52 .0197
72 .55 .0208
68 .59 .0220
64 .62 .0234
60 .66 .0250
56 .71 .0267
52 .77 .0288
48 .83 .0312
44 .91 .0340
40 1.0 .0375
36 1.11 .0416
32 1.25 .0478
28 1.43 .0535
24 1.66 .0625
20 2.0 .0750
16 2.5 .0937
12 3.33 .1250
8 5. .1870
4 10. .3750

Note 1 Either the unit pack weight or unit pack cube, whichever is the bottommost entry in
its respective column of the table, is the controlling factor in determining the number
of unit packs per intermediate container. When the controlling factor falls between
any two values listed in the appropriate column, the ICQ will be the lesser of the two
corresponding quantities given in the table.
Note 2 The following examples illustrate correct use of the table:
a. If the unit pack weight is .60 pounds and the unit cube in feet is .0175, 64 units
would be placed in the intermediate container.
b. If the unit pack weight is .49 pounds and the unit pack cube in feet is .0265, 56
unit packs would be placed in the intermediate container.
Note 3 Any unit pack that exceeds either ten pounds or 0.3750 cu. ft. shall not have an
intermediate container.

69
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

CONTAINERS

C.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides general requirements for containers used in military
packaging, lists available containers that meet the requirements of this standard, and provides
information to assist in the selection of the most economical container that will provide the
required protection for any given application. This appendix is a mandatory part of this
standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.

C.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

C.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections C.3, C.4,
and C.5 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this
list, document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements of documents
cited in sections C.3, C.4, and C.5 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

C.2.2 Government documents.

C.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and drawings. The following specifications and

standards form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise
specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PPP-B-566 - Boxes, Folding, Paperboard.

PPP-B-585 - Boxes, Wood, Wirebound.
PPP-B-676 - Boxes, Setup.
PPP-B-1672 - Boxes, Shipping, Reusable With
Cushioning.
PPP-C-96 - Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter.
PPP-D-723 - Drum, Fiber.
PPP-D-729 - Drums, Shipping and Storage, Steel, 55-
Gallon (208 Liters).
PPP-T-495 - Tubes, Mailing, and Filing

70
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-C-104 - Crates, Wood: Lumber and Plywood

Sheathed, Nailed, and Bolted.
MIL-DTL-117 - Bags, Heat-Sealable.
MIL-DTL-2427 - Box, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Nailed.
MIL-C-3774 - Crates, Wood; Open, 12,000- and 16,000-
Pound Capacity.
MIL-D-6054 - Drum, Metal-Shipping and Storage.
MIL-D-6055 - Drum, Metal Reusable, Shipping and
Storage (Cap. 88 to 510 cubic inches).
MIL-PRF-11264 - Container: Shipping, Reusable - for Tank
Automotive Engines, Transmissions,
Differentials, Transfers, Final Drives, Drive
Axles, and Similar Assemblies.
MIL-B-22020 - Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.
MIL-B-46506 - Boxes, Ammunition Packing, Wood,
Wirebound.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-648 - Design Criteria for Specialized Shipping

Containers.
MIL-STD-3010 - Test Procedures for Packaging Materials.
MS24347 - Drums, Metal, Reusable, Shipping and
Storage.
MS27683 - Drum, Metal, Shipping and Storage, 16 to
80 Gallons.
MS27684 - Drum, Metal, Shipping and Storage, 3 to 12
Gallons.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch

or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

71
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

C.2.2.2 Other Government Documents, Drawings and Publications. The following other
Government documents, drawings and publications form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

NAVICP DRAWINGS

P069 - Container, Molded, Reusable.

13414 - Container, Modular, Reusable.
15024 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
15450 - Container, Shipping and Storage.

(These drawings may be obtained from NAVICP (Attn: 0712), 700 Robbins Avenue,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.)

WARNER ROBINS AIR LOGISTIC CENTER DRAWINGS

11214-5002-100 - Container, Shipping and Storage.

11214-5002-200 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
11214-5002-300 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
11214-5002-400 - Container, Shipping and Storage.

(These drawings may be obtained from WR-ALC/TILAS, 420 Second St., Suite 100,
Robins AFB, GA 31098-1640.)

C.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these
documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM-D5118 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Fiberboard Shipping

Boxes (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5168 - Standard Practice for Fabrication and Closure of Triple
Wall Corrugated Fiberboard Containers (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D6039 - Standard Specification for Crates, Wood, Open and
Covered (DoD adopted).

72
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

ASTM-D6251 - Standard Specification for Wood-Cleated Panelboard

Shipping Boxes (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D6256 - Standard Specification for Wood-cleated Shipping Boxes
with Skidded, Load-Bearing Bases (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D6880 - Standard Specification for Wood Boxes.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://www.astm.org or from ASTM

International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

C.3 GENERAL

C.3.1 Unit container size. Flexible and rigid containers shall be sized to provide a snug
fit for the wrapped and cushioned item. Appropriate dunnage shall be used to fill voids. The
sequence of length, width and depth for ordering purposes shall be in accordance with the
applicable container specification.

C.3.2 Use of unit containers as shipping containers. Unit containers serve as shipping
containers only for the packing levels indicated in table C-II.

C.4 EXPENDABLE CONTAINERS

C.4.1 Interior containers. Table C-I lists specifications for various interior containers.

C.4.2 Exterior containers. Table C-II lists specifications for various exterior containers
with their weight limitations and the levels of protection for which their use is acceptable. Unit
containers that also serve as shipping containers must be selected from this table. When
containers fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118 are required, an appropriate standard
size shall be selected from table C-III. When one of these standard sizes cannot be used, the size
of the selected container must provide a snug fit for the wrapped and cushioned item.

C.5 REUSABLE CONTAINERS

C.5.1 Specialized containers.

C.5.1.1 Design. The design, development, test and evaluation of specialized shipping
containers for major equipment items and items which are subject to repair or Technical Order
Compliance (TOC) shall be in accordance with the requirements specified by the acquisition
activity.

73
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

C.5.1.2 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). When developing the packaging
requirements in accordance with 4.1 and when it has been determined that a specialized long life
container is required for an item, CDRS services shall be utilized in accordance with Appendix
H and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).

C.5.1.3 Specialized shipping containers for ordnance. General design criteria for the
design of reusable containers for ordnance and ordnance related items shall be in accordance
with MIL-STD-648. Container design and test requirements must be tailored based on the
logistics and engineering requirements of the item to be packaged.

C.5.2 Multiapplication containers.

C.5.2.1 Design and selection. Multiapplication containers employ shock reduction

systems that are able to protect a wide range of items to specified G-levels. Although these
containers are designed to protect repairable fragile items, features such as reusability,
versatility, and low labor costs of insertion and removal of the item make them cost effective for
many less fragile and non-repairable items. The DoD packaging activity (at the inventory
control point), contractor, subcontractor, or vendor shall select the appropriate multiapplication
container for an item based on the size, weight, and fragility parameters listed in table C-IV.

C.5.2.2 Identification. All multiapplication containers are assigned National Stock

Numbers (NSNs) as indicated in table C-IV.

C.5.2.3 Coded data. Appendix J provides codes to identify each type of multiapplication
container. This code, plus dimensions, completely specifies the type and size of container in
acquisition documents and DoD data systems.

C.5.2.4 Packaging design validation. The validation of packaging designs using

multiapplication containers shall be as follows:

a. Packages for items which meet the weight, dimension, and fragility factors of table
C-IV do not require design validation.

b. In cases where the fragility factor of an item is unknown, or is less than that listed in
table C-IV, packaging validation testing to verify the ability of the selected
multiapplication container to protect the item shall be conducted in accordance with
the provisions of Appendix F.

74
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

C.5.2.5 Short life containers. Container Types I thru IV listed in table C-IV are short life
multiapplication containers. These containers are briefly described as follows:

a. Type I. Consists of a polyurethane foam cushion insert with a diecut, star shaped,
vertical cavity, and top and bottom pads of the same material assembled in the
container. Type I is used for packaging fragile items, either rectangular or
cylindrical in shape, such as meters, gauges, and air speed indicators. Items
packaged in this star pack type are inserted (loaded) into the cavity from the top of
the container prior to placing the top pad in place.

b. Type II. Consists of a convoluted polyurethane foam cushion bonded to container

board. This assembly is subsequently folded up to become the slide of a modified
triple slide box. Although the cushioning provides protection against shock, it
essentially holds the item in place by pre-compression of the convoluted tips. Type
II is used for circuit boards and electronic modules. It is also used for packing glass
envelope electronic tubes or other items whose depth does not exceed the limits
shown in table C-IV.

c. Type III. Consists of a telescoping container with bonded convoluted (some end and
side pads are flat sheet stock) polyurethane foam cushioning which forms an oblong
cavity. Type III is used to pack equipment such as receiver-transmitters, amplifiers,
power supply units, and electronic indicators.

d. Type IV. Consists of a two piece (top and bottom) polyurethane foam insert, which
forms a star shaped cavity when the two pieces are mated in conjunction with end
pads of flat sheet stock. The insert components and end pads are bonded in place in
a half telescoping container fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, Type CF,
Style DBLCC. The cushioning insert is similar to the Type I star pack insert except
that it is cut along (horizontal to) its greatest dimensional length to facilitate
insertion (loading) and extraction of relatively long, rectangular or cylindrical items
such as voltage regulators, electronic receivers, panels, transmitters, couplers and
amplifiers.

When using these short life containers for items which do not completely fill the preformed
cushion cavity, the item shall be immobilized by adding additional compatible cushioning
material. Items whose dimensions slightly exceed the cushion cavity can be carefully pressed
into position.

75
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

C.5.2.6 Long life containers. Container Types VI thru X listed in table C-IV are long
life multiapplication containers. These containers are briefly described as follows:

a. Type VI. Consists of two halves of a polyethylene blow molded container with
polyurethane cushioning and an electrostatic protective cushioned bag. This is used
to ship circuit cards and similar type components.

b. Type VII. Consists of a plastic type container with bonded convoluted polyurethane
foam cushioning which forms a cavity.

c. Type VIII. Consists of a plastic type container with a coiled steel cable shock
mounted platform to which is strapped highly sensitive equipment.

d. Type IX. Consists of two halves of a plastic container. A load platform suspended
by elastomeric shock mounts is in one half. Strap tie-downs are used to hold items
in place on the load platform. Type IX containers are made in four varieties and
provide 15G shock protection for shock sensitive avionics-type equipment in the 10
to 91 pound weight range.

e. Type X. Consists of two halves of a plastic container. A load platform suspended

by elastomeric shock mounts is in the bottom half. Strap tie-downs are used to hold
items in place on the load platform. Type X containers are made in seven sizes and
provide 45 G shock protection for shock sensitive electronics-type equipment in the
3-75 pound weight range.

C.5.2.7 Multiapplication container availability.

C.5.2.7.1 General Services Administration (GSA). Types I through IV and Type IX

multiapplication containers are stocked by GSA (Federal Supply Service). DoD and Federal
Agencies may obtain them from GSA. When authorized by the administrative contracting
officer and with concurrence of the GSA regional office affected, Government contractors may
buy direct from GSA. The Government may also elect to supply these packs to contractors as
government furnished property.

76
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

C.5.2.7.2 Naval Inventory Control Point (NAVICP). Types VI through VIII and X are
stocked by the NAVICP. DoD and Federal Agencies may obtain them from NAVICP,
Philadelphia, PA. The Government may also elect to supply these packs to contractors as
government furnished property.

C.5.2.7.3 Commercial sources. Suppliers of the multiapplication containers are located

nationwide. Names of these suppliers are available from the Contract Administration Activity.

77
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-I. Interior containers.

Specification Description

PPP-B-566 Boxes, Folding, Paperboard:

Variety 1, Process I or II
Variety 2, Process I
Variety 2, Process II

PPP-B-676 Boxes, Setup

PPP-C-96 Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter

PPP-T-495 Tubes, Mailing, and Filing

MIL-DTL-117 Bags, Heat-Sealable

MIL-DTL-6060 Bags, Watervaporproof, Heat-Sealable,

Complex

MIL-B-22020 Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, VCI

Treated

ASTM-D5118 Fiberboard Shipping Boxes:

Class domestic

78
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-II. Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum

weight of contents and level of packing.

Weight of Military
Specification Description Contents Packing Remarks
(lbs., max) Level
PPP-B-585 Boxes, Wood,
Wirebound 400 B
Class 1 300 A
Class 3
PPP-B-1672 Box, Shipping, B See table C-IV, Type
Reusable with I thru IV for weight
Cushioning and size restrictions
PPP-D-729 Drums, Shipping and A
Storage, Steel, 55-
Gallon
MIL-C-104 Crates, Wood: 30,000 A Size limitation:
Lumber and Plywood 30'Lx9'Wx10'H
Sheathed, Nailed, and (unless otherwise
Bolted specified)
MIL-DTL-2427 Box, Ammunition A Top opening or end
Packing: Wood, opening with or
Nailed without handles
MIL-C-3774 Crates, Wood; Open Bolted or nailed
Type I 12,000 A assembly; size
Type II 16,000 limitations:
Type I-16'x8'x8'
Type II- 40'x8'x16'
MIL-D-6054 Drum, Metal-Shipping A MS27683: 16 to 80
and Storage gal capacity
MS27684: 3 to 12 gal
capacity

79
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-II. Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum

weight of contents and level of packing – Continued.

Weight of Military
Specification Description Contents Packing Remarks
(lbs., max) Level
MIL-D-6055 Drum, Metal Reusable, A MS24347; various
Shipping and Storage sizes available
(Cap. 88 to 510 cubic
inches)
MIL-PRF- Containers, Shipping, A For vehicular
11264 Reusable assemblies weighing
over 1600 pounds
MIL-B- Boxes, Ammunition A Top opening, with or
46506 Packing, Wood, without handles
Wirebound
NAVICP Container, Molded, 4 A For circuit boards and
Dwg. P069 Reusable modules; See table C-
IV, Type VI
NAVICP Container, Modular, 120 A For major repairables;
Dwg. 13414 Reusable See table C-IV, Type
VII
NAVICP Container, Shipping and 40 A For gyroscopic
Dwg. 15024 Storage instruments; See table
C-IV, Type VIII
NAVICP Container, Shipping and 75 A For depot level
Dwg. Storage repairables; see table
15450 C-IV, Type X

80
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-II. Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum

weight of contents and level of packing – Continued.

Weight of Military
Specification Description Contents Packing Remarks
(lbs., max) Level
WRALC Container, Shipping and 16.5 A For gyroscopic
Dwg. 11214- Storage instruments; See table
5002-100 C-IV, Type IX
WRALC Container, Shipping and 25 A For gyroscopic
Dwg. 11214- Storage instruments; see table
5002-200 C-IV, Type IX
WRALC Container, Shipping and 54 A For gyroscopic
Dwg. 11214- Storage instruments; see table
5002-300 C-IV, Type IX
WRALC Container, Shipping and 91 A For gyroscopic
Dwg. 11214- Storage instruments; see table
5002-400 C-IV, Type IX
ASTM- Fiberboard Shipping See B See table C-III for
D5118 Boxes appropriate standard sizes
Weather resistant table in
ASTM-
D5118
ASTM- Boxes, Fiberboard, See B
D5168 Corrugated, Triple Wall, ASTM-
Weather Resistant D5168
ASTM- Crates, Wood, Open and 4,000 For size and weight
D6039 Covered restrictions, see
Style A A ASTM-D6039
Style B B
ASTM- Wood-Cleated Panelboard
D6251 Boxes
Type III
Class 1, domestic 1000 B Plywood panels
Class 2, overseas 1000 A Plywood panels
ASTM- Wood Cleated Shipping 2,500 A,B
D6256 Boxes with Skidded, Load
Bearing Bases

81
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-II. Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum

weight of contents and level of packing – Continued.

Weight of Military
Specification Description Contents Packing Remarks
(lbs., max) Level
ASTM- Boxes, Wood
D6880 Class 1 – Light Duty 800 B Skidded as required
Class 2 – Heavy Duty 1,000 A

82
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-III. Fiberboard container size list.

Container Inside Container Out- Container Bursting

Dimensions National Container side Dimensions Cube Type Grade Class Style Variety Strength
2
(inches) Stock No. Wt. (lbs.) (inches) (cu . ft.) (lbs/in. )

4x4x12 8115-00-418-4660 .74 4.3x4.3x12.5 .134 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400

4x4x16 8115-00-200-6954 .72 4.3x4.3x16.5 .177 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
5x5x20 8115-01-030-3532 .88 5.3x5.3x20.5 .333 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
6x4x8 8115-00-190-4888 .45 6.3x4.3x8.5 .135 CF W6c WR RSC SW 175
6x6x6 8115-00-183-9503 .52 6.3x6.3x6.5 .149 CF W6c WR RSC SW 175
6x6x10 8115-00-417-9440 .68 6.3x6.3x10.5 .241 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
6x6x18 8115-00-190-4920 1.00 6.3x6.3x18.5 .425 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
6x6x24 8115-00-190-4921 1.25 6.3x6.3x24.5 .563 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
8x4x4 8115-00-183-9500 .38 8.3x4.3x4.5 .093 CF W6c WR RSC SW 175
8x8x8 8115-00-183-9498 .90 8.3x8.3x8.5 .339 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
8x8x10 8115-00-183-9499 1.02 8.3x8.3x10.5 .419 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
8x8x12 8115-00-281-3882 1.12 8.3x8.3x12.5 .498 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
8x8x14 8115-01-166-6459 1.25 8.3x8.3x14.5 .578 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
8x8x16 8115-00-190-4936 1.35 8.3x8.3x16.5 .658 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
8x8x24 8115-00-417-9442 1.80 8.3x8.3x24.5 .977 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
9x6x6 8115-00-190-4950 .66 9.3x6.3x6.5 .220 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
9x6x18 8115-01-029-6777 1.50 9.3x6.3x18.5 .627 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
9x9x9 8115-01-166-6460 1.15 9.3x9.3x9.5 .476 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
10x6x4 8115-00-183-9496 .60 10.5x6.3x4.5 .172 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
10x8x6 8115-00-183-9497 .90 10.5x8.3x6.5 .328 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
10x10x8 8115-00-183-9494 1.26 10.5x10.5x8.5 .542 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
10x10x10 8115-00-190-4959 1.40 10.5x10.5x10.5 .670 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
10x10x12 8115-01-034-0370 1.50 10.5x10.5x12.5 .798 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
10x10x16 8115-00-417-9414 1.80 10.5x10.5x16.5 1.053 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
11x11x11 8115-00-417-9406 1.70 11.5x11.5x11.5 .880 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
11.25x8.75x4 8115-01-012-5003 .93 11.5x9.0x6.5 .270 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
11-1/4x8-3/4x18 8115-00-190-4969 1.86 11.5x9.0x18.5 1.108 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x6x6 8115-00-183-9492 .78 12.5x6.3x6.5 .296 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x6x12 8115-00-190-4974 1.15 12.5x6.3x12.5 .570 CF W5c WR RSC SW 275
12x6x15 8115-00-417-9380 1.32 12.5x6.3x15.5 .706 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x9x6 8115-01-011-3626 1.10 12.3x9.3x6.5 .430 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x12x4 8115-00-190-4860 1.35 12.5x12.5x4.5 .407 CF W6c WR RSC SW 175
12x12x8 8115-00-417-9378 1.50 12.5x12.5x8.5 .769 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x12x10 8115-00-183-9490 1.81 12.5x12.5x10.5 .949 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x12x12 8115-00-183-9491 1.97 12.5x12.5x12.5 1.130 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
12x12x14 8115-00-409-3807 2.14 12.5x12.5x14.5 1.311 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
13x13x13 8115-01-166-6461 2.48 13.3x13.3x13.5 1.382 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x10x6 8115-00-495-5458 1.35 14.5x10.5x6.5 .573 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x10x10 8115-01-030-3537 1.68 14.5x10.5x10.5 .925 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x12x8 8115-00-183-9488 1.80 14.5x12.5x8.5 .892 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x14x12 8115-00-183-9489 2.22 14.5x14.5x12.5 1.521 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x14x14 8115-00-417-9321 2.68 14.5x14.5x14.5 1.764 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x14x16 8115-00-585-4906 2.75 14.5x14.5x16.5 2.008 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
14x14x18 8115-00-417-9320 3.00 14.5x14.5x18.5 2.251 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
15x15x10 8115-00-417-9318 2.55 15.5x15.5x10.5 1.460 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
16x12x8 8115-00-183-9487 1.93 16.5x12.5x8.5 1.015 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
16x12x12 8115-00-418-4653 2.28 16.5x12.5x12.5 1.492 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
16x16x12 8115-00-451-7853 3.09 16.5x16.5x12.5 1.969 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
16x16x16 8115-00-190-5002 3.50 16.5x16.5x16.5 2.600 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
18x12x12 8115-00-514-2409 2.50 18.5x12.5x12.5 1.673 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
18x15x10 8115-00-190-5007 2.81 18.5x15.5x10.5 1.742 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400

83
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-III. Fiberboard container size list – Continued.

Container Inside Container Out- Container Bursting

Dimensions National Container side Dimensions Cube Type Grade Class Style Variety Strength
2
(inches) Stock No. Wt. (lbs.) (inches) (cu . ft.) (lbs/in. )
18x15x15 8115-00-417-9292 3.34 18x5x15.5x15.5 2.572 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
18x18x12 8115-00-183-9482 3.64 18x5x18.5x12.5 2.476 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
18x18x18 8115-00-428-4185 4.38 18.5x18.5x18.5 3.664 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
20x10x10 8115-01-166-6462 2.05 20.5x10.5x10.5 1.308 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
20x12x12 8115-01-008-3645 2.60 20.3x12.3x12.5 1.806 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
20x16x16 8115-00-275-5777 3.90 20.5x16.5x16.5 3.230 CF W6c WR RSC SW 175
20x20x12 8115-00-428-4183 4.30 20.5x20.5x12.5 3.040 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
20x20x20 8115-00-428-4158 5.35 20.5x20.5x20.5 4.986 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
22x22x12 8115-00-428-4145 5.00 22.5x22.5x12.5 3.662 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x12x12 8115-01-166-6464 2.90 24.5x12.5x12.5 2.215 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x16x12 8115-00-183-9481 3.80 24.5x16.5x12.5 2.924 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x16x16 8115-00-292-0123 4.32 24.5x16.5x16.5 3.860 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x18x18 8115-01-163-9189 5.00 24.5x18.5x18.5 4.853 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x20x16 8115-00-417-9236 5.30 24.5x20.5x16.5 4.796 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x24x10 8115-00-428-4124 5.45 24.5x24.5x10.5 3.647 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x24x12 8115-00-174-2354 5.75 24.5x24.5x12.5 4.342 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x24x16 8115-01-119-2523 6.05 24.5x24.5x16.5 5.732 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x24x20 8115-01-166-6451 6.70 24.5x24.5x20.5 7.121 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
24x24x24 8115-00-417-9416 7.62 24.5x24.5x24.5 8.510 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
26x12x8 8115-01-166-6450 3.00 26.5x12.5x8.5 1.629 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
26x12x10 8115-01-166-6449 3.30 26.5x12.5x10.5 2.013 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
26x18x18 8115-01-166-6454 5.50 26.5x18.5x18.5 5.249 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
26x26x20 8115-01-166-6463 7.00 26.5x26.5x20.5 8.331 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
29x14x14 8115-01-166-6447 4.00 29.5x14.5x14.5 3.589 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
30x12x6 8115-00-190-5017 2.61 30.5x12.5x6.5 1.434 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
30x12x12 8115-01-166-6448 3.50 30.5x12.5x12.5 2.758 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
30x16x16 8115-00-292-0120 5.00 30.5x16.5x16.5 4.805 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
30x20x12 8115-01-163-3446 4.80 30.5x20.5x12.5 4.523 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
34x14x10 8115-00-564-8053 3.75 34.5x14.5x10.5 3.040 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
34x20x15 8115-01-166-6455 6.00 34.5x20.5x16.0 6.549 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
34x20x20 8115-01-166-6456 6.50 34.5x20.5x20.5 8.390 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
36x12x12 8115-01-166-6457 3.82 36.5x12.5x12.5 3.300 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
36x14x14 8115-00-190-5020 4.70 36.5x14.5x14.5 4.441 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
36x24x22 8115-01-166-5118 7.20 36.5x24.5x22.5 11.644 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400
40x14x14 8115-01-166-6452 6.00 40.5x14.5x14.5 4.928 CF V3c WR RSC SW 400

84
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection.

TYPE I
PPP-B-1672, Vertical Star (Table J-VII, Code NR)
Container ID (inches) Item weight Packaged outside Packaged
Recommended max. bare Maximum Shock (G’s)
(National Stock Number) range dimensions Cube
item dimensions (in.) Transmitted to item
(Pack Code) (lbs.) (inches) (cu. ft.)
6 x 6 x 10 3 Dia x 6 1.0 - 1.5 30 – 40 6.3 x 6.3 x 10.5 .242
(8115-00-192-1603) 1.6 - 2.2 25 – 29
(XA1) 2.3 - 3.0 30 – 40
3x3x6 1.5 - 4.0 30 – 40
8 x 8 x 12 3x3x8 1.5 - 4.0 30 – 40 8.3 x 8.3 x 12.5 .499
(8115-00-192-1604) 4 Dia x 8 3.0 - 7.5 25 – 29
(XA2) 7.6 - 8.5 30 – 40
4x4x8 3.0 - 5.0 25 – 29
5.1 - 7.0 30 – 40
5 Dia x 8 3.5 - 5.5 30 – 40
10 x 10 x 12 4 Dia x 6 2.0 - 3.0 30 – 40 10.5 x 10.5 x 12.5 .798
(8115-00-192-1605) 3.1 - 4.5 25 – 29
(XA3) 4.6 - 5.0 30 – 40
5 Dia x 6 3.0 - 6.0 30 – 40
6 Dia x 6 4.5 - 7.0 30 – 40
5x5x6 4.0 - 9.0 30 – 40
12 x 12 x 14 5 Dia x 8 3.5 - 4.5 25 – 29 12.5 x 12.5 x 14.5 1.312
(8115-00-134-3655) 4.6 - 8.5 20 – 24
(XA4) 6 Dia x 8 5.0 - 7.0 25 – 29
7.1 – 13.0 20 – 24
5x5x8 3.0 - 5.0 30 – 40
5.1 - 7.0 25 – 29
7.1 – 11.0 20 – 24
6x6x8 5.0 - 7.0 30 – 40
7.1 – 10.0 25 – 29
10.1 – 12.0 20 – 24
12 x 12 x 18 5 Dia x 10 4.0 - 5.0 25 – 29 12.5 x 12.5 x 18.5 1.673
(8115-00-050-5237) 5.1 – 11.0 20 – 24
(XA5) 6 Dia x 10 6.0 - 8.0 25 – 29
8.1 – 16.0 20 – 24
5 x 5 x 10 4.0 - 6.0 30 – 40
6.1 - 8.0 25 – 29
8.1 – 13.0 20 – 24
6 x 6 x 10 8.0 – 10.0 30 – 40
10.1 – 14.0 25 – 29
14.1 – 20.0 20 – 24
14 x 14 x 16 6 Dia x 10 6.0 – 15.0 25 – 29 14.5 x 14.5 x 16.5 2.008
(8115-00-134-3656) 7 Dia x 10 8.0 – 14.0 20 – 24
(XA6) 14.1 – 17.0 24 – 29
17.1 – 20.0 30 – 40
6 x 6 x 10 5.0 - 7.0 30 – 40
7.1 - 9.0 24 – 29
9.1 – 12.0 20 – 24
7 x 7 x 10 6.5 - 9.0 30 – 40
9.1 – 12.0 25 – 29
12.1 – 21.0 20 – 24
21.1 – 23.0 25 - 29

85
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE II

PPP-B-1672, folding convoluted (Table J-VII, Code NS)

Container ID (inches) Packaged Out- Packaged
Recommended max. bare Typical item
(National Stock Number) side Dimensions Cube
item dimensions (in.) weight (lbs.)
(Pack Code) (inches) (cu. ft.)
6 x 5 x 2-1/2 5 x 4-1/2 x 1-1/4 0.5 6.3 x 5.3 x 3.0 .058
(8115-00-787-2142)
(XC1)
6 x 5 x 3-1/2 5 x 4-1/2 x 2-1/4 1.0 6.3 x 5.3 x 4.0 .078
(8115-00-787-2147)
(XC2)
9 x 6 x 2-1/2 8 x 5-1/2 x 1-1/4 0.9 9.3 x 6.3 x 3.0 .102
(8115-00-101-7647)
(XC3)
9 x 6 x 3-1/2 8 x 5-1/2 x 2-1/4 1.8 9.3 x 6.3 x 4.0 .136
(8115-00-101-7638)
(XC4)
10 x 10 x 3-1/2 9 x 9-1/2 x 2-1/4 1.8 10.5 x 10.5 x 4.0 .256
(8115-01-057-1244)
(XC9)
12 x 8 x 2-1/2 11 x 7-1/2 x 1-1/4 1.8 12.5 x 8.3 x 3.0 .181
(8115-00-787-2146)
(XC5)
12 x 8 x 3-1/2 11 x 7-1/2 x 2-1/4 3.6 12.5 x 8.3 x 4.0 .241
(8115-00-787-2148)
(XC6)
13 x 13 x 3-1/2 12 x 12-1/2 x 2-1/4 4.3 13.5 x 13.5 x 4.0 .422
(8115-01-057-1243)
(XD1)
16 x 16 x 3-1/2 15 x 15-1/2 x 2-1/4 8.6 16.5 x 16.5 x 4.0 .631
(8115-01-057-1245)
(XD2)
18 x 12 x 2-1/2 17 x 11-1/2 x 1-1/4 4.3 18.5 x 12.5 x 3.0 .402
(8115-01-019-4085)
(XC7)
18 x 12 x 3-1/2 17 x 11-1/2 x 2-1/4 8.6 18.5 x 12.5 x 4.0 .536
(8115-01-019-4084)
(XC8)
24 x 16 x 3-1/2 23 x 15 x 2-1/4 10.0 24.5 x 16.5 x 4.0 .936
(8115-01-093-3730)
(XD3)
NOTE: Because items assigned to these packs are not of extremely low fragility, dynamic cushioning values
have not been determined.
86
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE III

PPP-B-1672, telescoping encapsulated (Table J-VII, Code NV)

Recommended Item Maximum Shock
Container ID (inches) Packaged outside Packaged
max. bare item weight (G’s)
(National Stock Number) dimensions Cube
dimensions range transmitted to
(Pack Code) (inches) (cu. ft.)
(in.) (lbs.) item
30 x 16 x 14 24 x 11 x 9 28 – 48 30 – 39 31.0 x 17.0 x 14.5 4.423
(8115-00-516-0242) 49 – 54 40 – 50
(XE1)
32 x 12 x 14 26 x 6 x 8 12 – 19 30 – 39 33.0 x 13.0 x 14.5 3.600
(8115-00-519-1825) 20 – 29 25 – 29
(XE2) 30 – 33 40 – 50
26 x 9 x 9 20 x 5 x 5 20 (max.) 50 (max.) 27.0 x 10.0 x 9.3 1.454
(8115-01-015-1313)
(XE8)
24 x 14 x 14 18 x 8 x 8 13 – 16 30 – 39 25.0 x 15.0 x 14.5 3.147
(8115-00-550-3558) 17 – 38 25 – 29
(XE3)
20 x 14 x 9 16 x 10 x 5 6–7 30 – 39 21.0 x 15.0 x 9.5 1.732
(8115-00-516-0251) 7–8 40 – 50
(XE4)
25 x 14 x 14 13 x 7 x 7 7 – 14 20 – 24 26.0 x 15.0 x 14.5 3.273
(8115-00-550-3574) 15 – 16 30 – 39
(XE5) 17 – 19 40 – 50
32 x 18 x 16 24 x 13 x 11 80 (max.) 20 – 24 32.5 x 18.5 x 17.0 5.916
(8115-01-015-1315)
(XE6)
34 x 24 x 18 25 x 18 x 12 90 (max.) 35 (max.) 36.5 x 26.5 x 19.0 10.636
(8115-01-015-1314)
(XE9)
24 x 18 x 16 18 x 13 x 11 20 – 39 25 – 29 25.0 x 19.0 x 16.5 4.536
(8115-01-015-1312) 40 – 50 30 – 39
(XE7)
30 x 27 x 14 24 x 21 x 8 26 – 45 21 – 28 31.0 x 28.0 x 15.0 7.535
(8115-01-094-6520) 46 – 50 23 – 30
(XF1)

87
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE IV

PPP-B-1672, horizontal star (Table J-VII, Code NW)

Container ID (inches) Recommended Item Maximum Shock
Packaged outside Packaged
(National Stock max. bare item weight (G’s)
dimensions Cube
Number) dimensions range transmitted to
(inches) (cu. ft.)
(Pack Code) (In.) (lbs.) item
20 x 14 x 14 14 x 5-1/8 x 5- 6 – 14 25 – 29 20.5 x 14.5 x 14.5 2.495
(8115-01-010-8956) 3/8 15 – 18 30 – 39
(XG1) 19 – 21 40 – 50

10 – 14 30 – 39
14 x 7 x 7 15 – 19 20 – 24
20 – 23 25 – 29
24 – 26 30 – 39
27 – 29 40 – 50
22 x 16 x 16 16 x 6-3/8 x 6- 8 – 20 25 – 29 22.5 x 16.5 x 16.5 3.545
(8115-01-006-7257) 3/8 21 – 27 30 – 39
(XG2) 28 – 31 40 – 50

11 – 16 25 – 29
16 x 7-1/4 x 7- 17 – 21 20 – 24
1/4 22 – 24 25 – 29
25 – 27 30 – 39
28 – 31 40 – 50

88
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE VI
Molded Reusable Container Assy for Circuit Cards and Modules
NAVICP Drawing No. P069 (Table J-VII, Code NY)
Container ID (inches) *Recommended Item Maximum Shock Packaged outside Packaged
(National Stock max. load size weight (G’s) dimensions Cube
Number) (in.) range transmitted to (inches) (cu. ft.)
(lbs.) item
11.25 x 8.25 x 2.125 8.5 x 6.0 x 1.0 0-3 NOTE: Because 12.0 x 10.0 x 3.0 0.208
(8145-00-260-9556) items assigned to
these packs are
11.25 x 8.75 x 4.5 8.5 x 6.0 x 3.25 0-3 not of extremely 12.0 x 10.0 x 5.0 0.347
(8145-00-260-9548) low fragility,
Dynamic
13.25 x 10.75 x 2.125 10.5 x 8.0 x 1.00 0-4 cushioning values 14.0 x 12.0 x 3.0 0.292
(8145-00-260-9559) have not been
determined.
13.25 x 10.75 x 4.5 10.5 x 8.0 x 3.25 0-4 14.0 x 12.0 x 5.0 0.486
(8145-00-260-9562)
6.75 x 5.0 x 2.0 5.0 x 3.0 x 1.0 0-2 8.0 x 6.0 x 3.0 0.083
(8145-01-014-0440)

19.75 x 13.75 x 4.5 17.0 x 11.0 x 2.62 0-4 21.0 x 15.0 x 5.0 0.911
(8145-01-012-4088)

24.0 x 12.0 x 6.0 24.0 x 11.0 x 3.0 0-4 27.0 x 14.5 x 7.0 1.586
(8145-01-164-4073)

* Includes wrap, barrier, bag, cushioned pouch and other packaging materials as required.

89
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE VII
Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Major Repairables
NAVICP Drawing No. 13414 (Table J-VII, Code NZ)
Container ID (inches) *Recommended Max. item Maximum Packaged outside Packaged
(National Stock max. load size weight Shock (G’s) dimensions Cube
Number) (in.) (lbs) transmitted (inches) (cu. ft.)
to item
10 x 10 x 14 4x4x8 6.0 40 - 50 13.0 x 13.0 x 16.0 1.565
(8145-00-301-2987)

10 x 10 x 18 4 x 4 x 12 7.0 40 - 50 13.0 x 13.0 x 20.0 1.956

(8145-00-288-1396)

14.5 x 13 x 10 8.5 x 7 x 4 9.0 40 - 50 18.0 x 16.0 x 12.0 2.000

(8145-00-553-1539)

14 x 14 x 12 8x8x6 11.0 40 - 50 17.0 x 17.0 x 14.0 2.341

(8145-00-519-6384)
12 x 12 x 18 6 x 6 x 12 11.0 40 - 50 15.0 x 15.0 x 20.0 2.604
(8145-00-288-1397)

20 x 13 x 12 14 x 7 x 6 17.0 40 - 50 23.0 x 16.0 x 14.0 2.981

(8145-00-485-8256)

16 x 16 x 15 10 x 10 x 9 20.0 40 - 50 19.0 x 19.0 x 17.0 3.552

(8145-00-522-6907)

18 x 14.5 x 19 12 x 8.5 x 13 25.0 40 - 50 21.0 x 18.0 x 21.0 4.594

(8145-00-449-8424)
22.5 x 21 x 11.5 16.5 x 15 x 5.5 33.0 40 - 50 26.0 x 24.0 x 14.0 5.056
(8145-01-044-3289)

22 x 16 x 17 16 x 10 x 11 31.3 40 - 50 25.0 x 19.0 x 19.0 5.223

(8145-00-540-1762)

29 x 14.5 x 14 23 x 8.5 x 8 28.0 40 - 50 32.0 x 18.0 x 16.0 5.333

(8145-00-501-9138)
28 x 18 x 13 22 x 12 x 7 35.0 40 - 50 31.0 x 21.0 x 15.0 5.651
(8145-00-549-6647)
34 x 18 x 15 28 x 12 x 9 44 40 - 50 37.0 x 21.0 x 17.0 7.644
(8145-00-536-4925)
30 x 18 x 19 24 x 12 x 13 50 40 - 50 33.0 x 21.0 x 21.0 8.422
(8145-00-449-8427)

22.5 x 21 x 22.5 16.5 x 15 x 16.5 55 40 - 50 26.0 x 24.0 x 25.0 9.028

(8145-00-499-9808)

90
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE VII - Continued

Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Major Repairables

NAVICP Drawing No. 13414 (Table J-VII, Code NZ)
Container ID (inches) *Recommended Max. Maximum Packaged outside Packaged
(National Stock max. load size item Shock (G’s) dimensions Cube
Number) (in.) weight transmitted (inches) (cu. Ft.)
(lbs) to item
27 x 27 x 17 21 x 21 x 11 70 40 - 50 30.0 x 30.0 x 19.0 9.896
(8145-00-485-8250)

28 x 24.5 x 20.5 22 x 18.5 x 14.5 80 40 - 50 31.0 x 28.0 x 23.0 11.553

(8145-01-026-2369)

40 x 24 x 18 34 x 18 x 12 85 40 - 50 43.0 x 27.0 x 20.0 13.438

(8145-00-529-8585)

36 x 20 x 27 30 x 14 x 21 120 40 - 50 39.0 x 23.0 x 29.0 15.054

(8145-01-008-3683)

27 x 27 x 32 21 x 21 x 26 110 40 - 50 30.0 x 30.0 x 34.0 17.708

(8145-01-010-3776)

* Includes interior carton and associated blocking and bracing when applicable.

91
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE VIII
Shipping & Storage Containers for Gyroscopic Instruments
NAVICP Drawing No. 15024 (Table J-VII, Code MY)
Max
Handling Case,
Container ID *Max. load Item shock Packaged
outside Packaged
(inches) size without Item size using Weight (G’s) outside
dimensions cube
(National Stock handling case handling case Range transmitt dimensions
(National Stock (cu. ft)
Number) (in.) (lbs.) ed to (inches)
No.)
item
30 x 26.38 x 25.5 13 x 9 x 8 10.38 x 6.5 x 6.5 Max Length - 8.38 0.5 - 10.5 15 30.4 x 26.8 x 12.070
(8145-01-016- (8145-01-016- Max Width - 4.5 25.6
3451) 3453) Depth Min - 1.69
Max - 3.75

12.5 x 7.25 x 8 Max Length - 10.5

(8145-01-016- Max Width - 5.25
3454) Depth Min - 3.25
Max - 5.25

14 x 10.38 x 9.75 Max Length - 12

(8145-01-016- Max Width - 8.38
3455) Depth Min - 5
Max - 7

35 x 27 x 30 17.5 x 12.25 x 18 x 12.25 x Max Length - 16 8 – 40 15 35.4 x 29.0 x 18.061

(8145-01-016- 13 11.75 Max Width - 10.25 30.4
3452) (8145-01-016- Depth Min - 6.9
3456) Max - 9

19 x 14 x 14.25 Max Length - 17

(8145-01-016- Max Width - 12
3445) Depth Min - 9.5
Max - 11.5

* Includes wrap and cushioning as required to protect the barrier bag when applicable.

92
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE IX
Type IX. Shipping and Storage Containers for Avionics Instruments
and Shock Sensitive Items; Warner Robins Air Logistics Center
Drawing Nos. 11214-5002-100, 11214-5002-200, 11214-5002-300,
11214-5002-400 (Table J-VII, Code WY)
Item Maximum
Packaged outside Packaged
Container ID (inches) Weight Shock (G’s)
Item Size Max/Min (inches) dimensions Cube
(National Stock Number) Range Transmitted
(inches) (cu. ft.)
(lbs.) to item
24.5 x 23.25 x 21.75 10.5 x 9.75 x 9.25/4 x 4 x 5 10 – 15 27.5 x 26 x 25 10.344
(8145-01-235-1113) 16.5

32.5 x 32.25 x 27 21 x 21 x 15.75/8 x 6 x 5 12 - 25 15 35.25 x 35.25 x 30.25 21.752

(8145-01-235-1112)

32.5 x 32.25 x 27 21 x 21 x 15.75/12 x 6 x 6.75 25 - 54 15 35.25 x 35.25 x 30.25 21.752

(8145-01-236-5003)

38.5 x 44 x 36 25 x 32 x 20.8/15 x 8.75 x 7.75 40 - 91 15 41.13 x 37 x 39.13 34.461

(8145-01-235-1114)

93
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX C

TABLE C-IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.

TYPE X

Type X, Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Depot Level Repairables;

NAVICP Drawing No. 15450 (Table J-VII, Code RC)
Item Packaged
Packaged
Item Size Weight Outside
Container NSN Cube
(in.) Range Dimensions
(cu. ft.)
(lbs.) (in.)
8145-01-262-2982 Min. 8 x 4 x 4 3 - 10 19.0 x 15.0 x 12.0 1.979
Max. 12 x 8 x 8

8145-01-262-2983 Min. 12 x 8 x 6 10 - 20 21.0 x 19.0 x 15.0 3.464

Max. 14 x 12 x 9

8145-01-262-2984 Min. 14 x 12 x 7 15 - 30 23.5 x 22.0 x 16.0 4.787

Max. 16.5 x 15 x 10

8145-01-262-2985 Min. 14 x 12 x 9 20 - 40 35.0 x 20.0 x 18.0 7.292

Max. 28 x 13 x 12

8145-01-262-2986 Min. 14 x 14 x 10 30 - 60 23.5 x 23.5 x 21.0 6.711

Max. 16.5 x 16.5 x 15

8145-01-262-2987 Min. 14 x 14 x 10 30 - 60 35.0 x 28.0 x 20.5 11.626

Max. 28 x 21 x 14.5
8145-01-262-2988 Min. 25 x 14 x 10 45 - 75 41.0 x 28.0 x 20.0 13.287
Max. 34 x 21 x 14

94
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX D

DEVELOPMENT OF MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

FOR KITS (PARTS AND MODIFICATION)

D.1 SCOPE. This appendix covers the development of military packaging for parts kits and
modification kits (see 4.7). This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information
contained herein is intended for compliance, as applicable.

D.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.

This section is not applicable to this appendix.

D.3 PRESERVATION. Military preservation shall be applied to all items within the kits,
including Government furnished property (GFP) or spare parts (to be assembled into kits).
Methods of preservation shall be determined in accordance with Appendix A and procedures
contained herein. Unless otherwise specified, packaging requirements for parts and modification
kits shall be defined in Special Packaging Instructions (SPIs) (see E.3.2.4).

D.3.1 Consolidation of different items within a method of preservation. Hazardous items

will be packaged in the same container only if the commodities are compatible. Items of
different physical characteristics may be consolidated within the same method of preservation if
all of the following requirements are met:

a. The items to be consolidated are all part of the same individual kit, identified by a
single NSN.

b. The method of preservation shall afford adequate protection to the most critical item
contained therein.

c. The area of the protective barrier shall not be increased by the addition of noncritical
items to the extent that the package life will be shortened due to the increase in water
vapor transmission or that a substantial increase in desiccant will be required.

d. Items of a delicate nature shall not be subjected to damage from rugged items
contained within the same package.

e. Noncritical items of odd shapes or having sharp protrusions will not damage
protective barriers.

95
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX D

f. Items of dissimilar metals subject to damage from electrolytic action shall be

insulated with suitable material to prevent forming of galvanic cells.

g. Electromagnetic and electrostatic sensitive items shall be provided protection from

degradation with electrostatic or electromagnetic protective materials conforming to
military specifications.

D.3.2 Application of preservative compounds or oils.

D.3.2.1 Kits procured for oxygen equipment. No preservative compound or oil shall be
applied to any item that may come into contact with oxygen.

D.3.2.2 Preservation procedures. All items are to be thoroughly cleaned and dried in
accordance with 5.2.1 before application of preservative compounds or oils. In no instance shall
a preservative compound or oil be applied over an operational grease or oil.

D.3.2.3 Items susceptible to corrosion (iron, steel, magnesium, etc.). No preservative

compound or oil will be applied if application would be harmful to the item. Preservative
compounds are preferred; however, preservative oils may be used when compounds are difficult
to remove, or are not feasible due to size, configuration or application of the item.

D.4 UNIT PRESERVATION

D.4.1 Physical protection. When kit items require physical protection, cushioning, wraps
and containers of the minimum size and weight necessary to afford such protection shall be
applied.

D.4.2 Segregation of items within packs. Care will be used to ensure that items which
would be difficult to identify by visual observation are kept segregated and individually
identified. Segregation of items within a kit shall be accomplished by wraps, bags, boxes,
dividers, container separations, tubes, skin or blister packs or other approved means.

D.4.3 Skin packaging. When skin packaging is used for kits, provisions shall be
incorporated into the design layout for minimizing the size of the skin pack. This may be
accomplished by folding, slotting, scoring, creasing, or perforating the substrate.

D.4.3.1 Skin packaging metals. Segregated metal items coated with preservative shall be
wrapped with a greaseproof material unless the skin packaging material, ink, and backing board
in contact with the item are noncorrosive and greaseproof. Bare metal items not coated with a

96
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX D

preservative compound shall be wrapped with a neutral material unless the skin packaging
material, ink, and backing board in contact with the item are noncorrosive.

D.4.3.2 Skin packaging shims or gaskets. Kit items such as thin shims or paper gaskets,
that cannot be removed from the skin pack without damage to the item shall be placed in a bag or
other suitable protective media prior to film application to provide ease of removal.

D.5 PACKING AND MARKING OF KITS. Packing and marking requirements shall be in
accordance with 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5.

97
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX D

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

98
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

MILITARY PACKAGING DATA FORMS

E.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines procedures and provides necessary guidance and
instructions for the preparation of required military packaging data. This appendix is a
mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.

E.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

E.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections E.4, E.5 and
E.6 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements of documents cited
in sections E.4, E.5 and E.6 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

E.2.2 Government documents.

E.2.2.1 Standards. The following standards form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-129 - Military Marking for Shipment and Storage.

MIL-STD-961 - Defense and Program-Unique Specifications
Format and Content.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch

or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

E.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings, and publications. The following

Government document forms a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless
otherwise specified, the issue is that cited in the solicitation or contract.

H4/H8 Section A - Commercial and Government Entity

(CAGE) (Name to Code)

(Copies of this Cataloging Handbook H4/H8 are available from Commander, Defense
Logistics Service Center, ATTN: DLSC-WP, Federal Center, Battle Creek, MI 49017-3084.)

99
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following document forms a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issue of this document
is that cited in the solicitation or contract.

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

ASME-Y14.100 - Engineering Drawing and Related Documentation

Practices (DoD adopted).

(Application for copies should be addressed to the American Society of Mechanical

Engineers, Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990.)

E.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

E.3.1 Development of military packaging data. Military packaging data shall be

developed for each item entering the military supply system. Data to be submitted by
contractors shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of this standard. Each
applicable data item listed on DD Form 2326 (figure E-1) shall be completed, using the codes of
Appendix J where and when appropriate. Data shall be entered and supplemented as outlined in
E.4.1.

E.3.2 Recording military packaging data.

E.3.2.1 Recording of data. Unless otherwise specified by the procuring activity, figure
E-1 (DD Form 2326) "Preservation and Packing Data," is the form on which initial entry, or
revision to previously established and approved elements, of military packaging data shall be
annotated. Data shall be recorded in coded form or in the clear as required, or by reference to
specification(s) or Special Packaging Instructions (SPIs). Entries shall be recorded to assure
clear, legible reproduction of the data. The contractor may, upon approval of the contracting
agency, furnish the data in the form used for his internal operation, or via electronic media,
provided there is no change in the sequence and format of figure E-1.

E.3.2.2 National Stock Number (NSN) requirements. When preservation and packing
data are submitted on DD Form 2326, NSNs shall be provided in Part A of figure E-1 only.

E.3.2.3 Coded data. Coded data shall be as specified in E.4. If additional codes are
needed to specify a requirement, requests for inclusion, with substantiating data, shall be
initiated in accordance with the directions contained in J.3.2.1. Until the new requirement is
represented by a code symbol in Appendix J, Code Z or ZZ shall be used and details shown as
supplemental data.

100
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.3.2.4 Kits (Parts and Modification). Unless otherwise specified, packaging

requirements for modification and parts kits will be defined on special packaging instructions
(SPIs) (see Appendix D).

E.3.2.5 Special packaging instructions. SPIs shall be prepared in accordance with E.5.

E.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

E.4.1 Development of military packaging data. Packaging data is divided into the
following categories:
Item identification data (figure E-1, Part A)
Preservation and packing data (figure E-1, Part B)
Supplemental data (figure E-1, Part C)
Special packaging instruction data (figure E-1, Part D)
When data is requested it shall be developed as specified in E.4.2.4, E.4.2.5, E.4.2.6, and E.4.2.7.
Item identification data shall be developed for all items. Unless otherwise specified, no further
data need be developed for common group items. Preservation and packing data, supplemental
data, and special packaging instruction data shall be developed for selective and special group
items as required. Data elements 29 thru 49 and 79 of table E-II shall not be provided for special
group items, unless otherwise directed by the requiring activity.

E.4.1.1 Procedural specification data. When the packaging of an item can be defined by
use of procedural specifications, data elements of table E-II, table E-IV, and table E-I, columns
39-42 need not be developed. The appropriate procedural packaging specification shall be
invoked by direct reference as supplemental data (see table E-III, columns 22-80).

E.4.2 Preparation of military packaging data. The detailed guidance in tables E-I
through E-IV prescribes the procedures for inserting data on DD Form 2326. This is a multiple
use form designed to reduce the amount of work necessary in compiling data relative to
packaging of any given item. The form has provisions for:
Nomenclature
Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) code and
design activity's part number
Approval stamp (E.6.2)
Configuration item specification number
Item identification data
Preservation and packing data
Supplemental data
Special packaging instruction data
101
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

In the detailed guidance below, column numbers refer to the digit position indicators preprinted
on figure E-1.

E.4.2.1 Nomenclature. Show item name in the designated block on the figure E-1
format.

E.4.2.2 Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity code and part number.
Show the Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) code of the manufacturer and the part
number of the item, if any, in the appropriate block(s) on the figure E-1 format.

E.4.2.3 Configuration item (CI). When the contract requires development of a CI

specification for the item in accordance with MIL-STD-961, show configuration item
specification number for the item in the designated block on the figure E-1 format.

E.4.2.4 Item identification data. The elements of data in table E-I are applicable to the
identification and physical characteristics of the item. Information shall be entered on DD Form
2326, Part A as prescribed in table E-I.

E.4.2.5 Preservation and packing data. Table E-II provides the basic elements of data
required in preservation and packing. Information shall be entered on DD Form 2326, Part B as
prescribed in table E-II and as specified in E.4.1.

E.4.2.6 Supplemental data. The elements of data in table E-III are mandatory when
supplemental data is required. A "3" in column 80 of tables E-I and E-II indicate supplemental
data is required. Supplemental data is pertinent to the packaging process and is either a direct
reference to a specific packaging procedural specification or is information that is required in
addition to that shown in the preservation and packing data area (Part B of DD Form 2326).
Supplemental data shall be recorded on DD Form 2326, Part C as described in table E-III.
Narrative shall show only explanatory or instructional type information which directly
supplements the elements of the packaging requirements code in the preservation packing data
areas (DD Form 2326, Part B). Only 59 digits of supplemental data are permitted for any one
item. If the necessary supplemental data would exceed this limit, a SPI shall be prepared in
accordance with instructions in E.5 and Part D of DD Form 2326 shall be executed.

E.4.2.7 Special packaging instruction (SPI) data. A SPI will be developed in accordance
with E.5 when preservation-packing data and supplemental data do not provide sufficient detail
to allow reproduction of the complete package. When a SPI is required, the elements of data in
table E-IV shall be required as applicable. A "4" or "6" in column 80 of tables E-I and E-II
indicates a SPI is required.

102
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.5 SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTIONS

E.5.1 General. SPIs shall be prepared when the following conditions exist:

a. When the packaging code of DD Form 2326 (figure E-1) does not contain all
necessary packaging requirements and

b. When all necessary packaging requirements for complete fabrication and

assembly of the pack cannot be contained in the supplemental data area of DD
Form 2326.

E.5.2 Format. SPIs shall be prepared using a digital format and any one or a
combination of the following techniques:

a. Narrative, as appropriate.

b. Orthographic drawings (prepared in accordance with ASME-Y14.100).

c. Axonometric drawings (oblique, cabinet, isometric, diametric, trimetric).

d. Perspective drawings (developed by projection from orthographic drawings, by

commercially available scaled grids, or by other methods where a scalable
rendering results).

e. Photo-drawings (high contrast photographs in which all background and

nonpertinent information has been removed).

f. Computer graphics.

E.5.3 Elements. The specific format of a SPI is optional provided all of the requirements
of E.5.1 and E.5.2 are met and the ability to universally replicate the package is assured. At a
minimum, all SPIs shall include the following mandatory elements:

a. Part or drawing number.

b. Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code – Provide the 5-digit

numerical code of the packaging design activity as assigned in Cataloging
Handbook H4/H8, Commercial and Government Entity, Name to Code.

c. SPI number – Enter the SPI number provided by the service or agency. The
contractor shall enter only when provided by the service or agency.
103
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

d. National stock number – Provide the 13-position National Stock Number and,
when specified, the 2-position Material Management Aggregation Code
(MMAC), Service Management Code or Special Material Identification Code
(SMIC). If no NSN is available, provide the 5-digit numerical code assigned by
Cataloging Handbook H4/H8 to identify the manufacturer of the part and the
drawing or part number. Enter multiple NSNs if more than one NSN applies.

e. Date – Enter the ordinal date, reflecting the 2-position year and 3-position day of
the latest revision of the SPI (e.g., Feb. 5, 1999 would be "99036").

f. Revision – Enter revision symbol as an alphabetic character beginning with an

"A" for the first revision. Proceed through the alphabet for each succeeding
revision. Letters I, O, Q, S, X and Z shall not be used. Leave blank for original
SPIs.

g. QUP and ICQ – State each in-the-clear.

h. Unit pack weight – Provide to the nearest one tenth of a pound (e.g., 16.4) (not
required for SPIs covering more than one size shipping container).

i. Unit pack size – Provide to the nearest tenth of an inch in order by length, width,
and depth.

j. Unit pack cube – Provide to the nearest one thousandth of a cubic foot (e.g.,
3.155) (not required for SPIs covering more than one size shipping container).

k. Method of Preservation (MOP) – State MOP in the clear (see 5.2.3).

l. Cleaning and drying requirements.

m. Packing – Provide all applicable packing requirements for levels A and B.

Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be as specified in the applicable
container specification or supplemental closure requirements document.

n. Marking – Marking shall be as specified in MIL-STD-129. Special markings

(includes opening and closing instructions) must be given in detail when special
type containers or securing media are used. When specified, include instructions
to mark the SPI number on exterior (other than multiapplication) containers.

104
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.5.4 Detailed requirements.

E.5.4.1 Package assembly instructions. All details required for fabrication of the
package, including internal blocking, bracing, or contour supports shall be shown in their
relationship to the item being packaged. Sequential detailed packing instructions shall be
included in the SPI, as necessary. When the SPI covers blocking and bracing of unpacked items,
all details necessary to indicate special handling and storage shall be provided, including
instructions for cribbing, hoisting, tie down and supports. Axonometric, scaled perspective,
photo drawings or orthographic drawings may be used to show the various components of the
package in relation to each other and the contained item. Relationships of the component parts
of the package may be shown by exploded or partial exploded views. In most instances clarity is
enhanced by showing the item in phantom lines.

E.5.4.2 Bill of materials. The SPI shall include a list of all materials required for
complete fabrication and assembly of the package. All items listed on the bill of material shall
be identified, whenever possible, to applicable federal or military specifications (or DoD adopted
commercial standards) including types, grades, classes, styles, etc. These items shall not be
identified by trade name, commercial source, or commercial specification. When an item is
proposed for use that is not covered by any federal or military specification, the contractor shall
provide sufficient background data to demonstrate the benefits to be derived from its use.

E.5.4.3 Specification containers. Construction details of federal and military

specification containers need not be illustrated, except as necessary to clarify details of the
package. The specification number and type of container shall be shown. All pertinent details
shall be indicated when specification containers are modified. Details for specialized shock
mounts, preformed dunnage, etc., that will duplicate information on drawings prepared in
accordance with ASME-Y14.100 shall not be shown. However, the engineering drawing
numbers shall be indicated.

105
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.6 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED PACKAGING DATA

E.6.1 Procedures for submitting data for approval. The contract, the contractor shall
submit the packaging data prepared for each item for approval. This approval shall be obtained
prior to production packaging except for deviations which are in compliance with E.6.1.1 and
E.6.1.2 below.

E.6.1.1 Approval of data without National Stock Numbers. Forms shall not be submitted
for approval of packaging data without a National Stock Number (NSN) unless authorized by the
contracting agency or unless emergency shipments are required prior to assignment of an NSN.
An emergency situation is defined as a requirement for direct support of a system when a
situation such as work stoppage or condition status of the system might otherwise prevent it from
performing its mission. Upon receipt of the complete NSN, the contractor shall enter these on
the packaging data form and forward one copy to the DoD contracting activity (packaging
organization) for approval.

E.6.1.2 Approval of data for emergency shipments. When packaging data approval
cannot be obtained prior to initial shipment of material which is directed by an emergency
situation, the packaging data may, upon approval of the administrative contracting officer, be
submitted to the appropriate office simultaneously with shipment of the material. In no case
shall additional shipments of remaining identical items not required for emergency shipments be
allowed prior to data submittal without approval of the DoD contracting officer.

E.6.1.3 Approval of data of interest to one DoD agency. All packaging data which are
of sole interest to a particular DoD service or agency shall be submitted as applicable to the DoD
agency having item management responsibility for approval.

E.6.1.4 Use of background data for approval. The contractor shall make available, when
requested by the responsible DoD contracting activity (packaging organization), sufficient
background data (test reports, drawings or engineering details) to permit the reviewing activity
to determine the adequacy of the contractor-prepared packaging data.

E.6.1.5 Data for common items. Packaging data for common items using predetermined
codes shall be reviewed and approved at the option of the responsible DoD contracting activity
(packaging organization).

E.6.2 Return of approved data. Upon approval, the DoD contracting activity (packaging
organization) shall return one copy of the approved data to the contractor for file. Approval shall
be indicated by application of the approval stamp on the applicable forms.

106
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

E.6.3 Authentication. SPIs for hazardous materials shall be authenticated by the

responsible DoD activity.

E.6.4 Transmittal of data. The data required by this standard shall be in accordance with
the applicable data item description and must be referenced on the applicable Contract Data
Requirements List (DD Form 1423). Necessary modification to the data item descriptions must
be shown on the DD Form 1423.

E.6.4.1 Military packaging data. Unless otherwise specified on the DD Form 1423, the
contractor shall submit two (2) copies of DD Form 2326 (or alternate media, when specified)
along with a letter of transmittal showing quantity of items for which forms are being submitted,
directly to the DoD contracting activity. The letter of transmittal shall specify the contract and
order number and shall list the items for which the forms are submitted. The DoD contracting
activity (packaging organization) shall sign and return the letter of transmittal with the approved
copies of the data.

E.6.4.2 Special packaging instructions. When special packaging instructions are

required, they shall be submitted in the digital format specified by the acquiring activity.

107
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
1 Document identifier Enter "A" to identify as item identification data.
2-6 Reserved for system document control and
identification numbers and applicable prefix
designations.
7-21 National stock Show the identification number assigned to the item
number of supply (7-10 for Federal Supply Classification
code; 11-19 for National Item Identification
Number; when specified, 20-21 for Material
Management Aggregation Code (MMAC), Service
Management code or Special Material Identification
Code (SMIC). When NSN (Columns 7-19) is not
available, completion of columns 51-79 is
mandatory.
22-26 Unpackaged item Show actual net weight of item to the nearest one
weight tenth of a pound up to 9,999.9 pounds. Use zeros to
fill voids. For items in excess of 9,999.9 pounds,
show weight in whole pounds indicated as follows:

Show "A" in column 22 and the whole pounds in

columns 23-26. The "A" will indicate that the
numbers entered are to be multiplied by ten to
determine the actual weight (for example,
A9999=99,990 pounds).

Show "B" in column 22 and the whole pounds in

columns 23-26. The "B" will indicate that the
numbers entered are to be multiplied by one hundred
to determine the actual weight (for example,
B9999=999,900 pounds).

108
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 - Continued.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
22-26 Unpackaged item Show "C" in column 22 and the whole pounds in
(Cont.) weight (Cont.) columns 23-26. The "C" will indicate that the
numbers listed should be multiplied by 1000 to
determine the actual weight being entered (for
example, C9999=9,999,000 pounds).
27-38 Unpackaged item Show unpackaged item dimensions as configured for
dimensions packaging to the nearest tenth of an inch in order by
length, width, and depth. The largest diameter shall
be used to indicate length or width of cylindrical
items. Dimensions less than .1 inch show as "0001."
Use zeros to fill voids (for example, 0024, 0001)
NOTE: Coilable material shall be coiled and the
overall coiled dimensions used.
39-42 Packaging category In columns 39-40, show the appropriate two-digit
code code for the physical and chemical characteristics of
the item using table A-I. In column 41, show the
one-digit code for weight/size/fragility from table
A-II and in column 42 show the one-digit code for
preservative from table A-III.
43-44 Not used
45-47 Quantity per unit State quantity per unit pack (QUP) in the clear.
pack
48-50 Intermediate When intermediate containers are used, enter the
container quantity number of unit packs to be included in the
intermediate container in-the-clear up to 100. If
there is no requirement for intermediate containers,
enter "0/0/0/".
51-55 Commercial and Enter the 5-digit numerical code, corresponding to
Government Entity the manufacturer of the part, assigned in
code of the conformance with Cataloging Handbook H4/H8.
manufacturer of the
part

109
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 – Continued.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
56-79 Drawing or part Enter the drawing or part number of the item being
number packaged, as applicable. These columns may be left
blank if NSN information is entered in columns 7-
21.
80 Part indicator Enter one of the following as appropriate:

(a) If only Part A will be used, enter "1".

(b) If Parts A and B will be used, enter "2".

(c) If Parts A, B, and C will be used, enter "3".

(d) If Parts A, B and D will be used, enter "4".

(e) If only Parts A and C will be used, enter "5".

(f) If Parts A, B, C, and D will be used, enter "6".

110
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
1 Document identifier Enter "B" to identify as preservation-packing data.
2-6 Reserved for system document control and
identification numbers and applicable prefix
designations.
7-21 National stock Show the identification number assigned to the item
number of supply (7-10 for Federal Supply Classification
code; 11-19 for National Item Identification
Number; when specified, 20-21 for Material
Management Aggregation Code (MMAC), Service
Management Code or Special Material Identification
Code (SMIC).
22-28 Not used
29-30 Method of Select appropriate code from tables J-I and J-Ia.
preservation Determination of method of preservation shall be
based on one of the following:

(a) Table A-I. Identify the appropriate method

applicable to the item in accordance with 5.2.3.

(b) Table A-IV for common group items.

31 Cleaning procedure Select appropriate code from table J-II or table A-
IV. for common group items.
32-33 Preservative material Select appropriate code from table J-III or table A-
IV for common group items.
34-35 Wrap Select appropriate code from table J-IV or table
A-IV for common group items.
36-37 Cushioning and Select appropriate code from table J-V or table A-IV
dunnage for common group items.
38 Cushioning thickness Select appropriate code from table J-VI or table A-
IV for common group items.
39-40 Unit container Select appropriate code from table J-VII or table
A-IV for common group items. Note: If the unit
container is also the shipping container, the level of
protection limitations of table C-II must be met.
41 Not used

111
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 - Continued.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
42-43 Intermediate Select appropriate code from table J-VII.
container
44 Unit container level Select appropriate code from table J-VIII.
45-46 Special marking Select appropriate code from table J-X. When more
than one code or when any special marking not
included in the table must be specified, show "ZZ"
and specify in supplemental data.
47 Level A packing Select appropriate code from table J-IX.
48 Level B packing Select appropriate code from table J-IXa.
49 Minimal packing If applicable, select code from table J-IXb.
50-54 Unit pack weight Show actual unit pack weight in-the-clear to the
nearest one tenth of a pound up to 9,999.9 pounds.
Use zeros to fill voids. For packs in excess of
9,999.9 pounds, show weight in whole pounds
indicated as follows:

(a) Show "A" in column 50 and the whole

pounds in columns 51-54. The "A" will indicate
that the numbers entered are to be multiplied by
ten to determine the actual weight (for example,
A9999=99,990 pounds).

(b) Show "B" in column 50 and the whole

pounds in columns 51-54. The "B" will indicate
that the numbers listed should be multiplied by
one hundred to determine the actual weight (for
example, B9999=999,900 pounds).

(c) Show "C" in column 50 and the whole

pounds in columns 51-54. The "C" will indicate
that the numbers listed should be multiplied by
1000 to determine the actual weight (for example,
C9999=9,999,000 pounds).

112
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 - Continued.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
55-66 Unit pack size Show unit container outside dimensions in-the-clear
to the nearest tenth of an inch in order by length,
width, and depth. Use "0001" to show dimensions
less than .1 of an inch. Use zeros to fill voids (for
example, "0024", "0001").
67-73 Unit pack cube Show actual cube of the unit pack to the nearest one
thousandth of a cubic foot up to 9,999.999 cubic
feet. For items with cube in excess of 9,999.999
cubic feet, show X in column 67 and indicate cube
in whole cubic feet in columns 68-73.
74-78 Not used
79 Optional procedure Select appropriate code from table J-VIIIa.
indicator
80 Part indicator Enter one of the following as appropriate:

(a) If Parts A and B will be used, enter "2".

(b) If Parts A, B and C will be used, enter "3".

(c) If Parts A, B, and D will be used, enter "4".

(d) If Parts A, B, C, and D will be used, enter "6".

113
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-III. Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
1 Document identifier Enter "C" to identify as supplemental data.
2-6 Reserved for system document control and
identification numbers and applicable prefix
designations.
7-21 National stock Show the identification number assigned to the item
number of supply (7-10 for Federal Supply Classification
code; 11-19 for National Item Identification
Number; when specified, 20-21 for Material
Management Aggregation Code (MMAC), Service
Management Code or Special Material Identification
Code (SMIC).
22-80 In-the-clear If there is an applicable procedural specification for
instructions the item being packaged, and the packaging
requirements are adequately defined therein, enter
two asterisks followed by the specification number
beginning in column 22. For example, the
information shall be entered as follows:

**MIL-DTL-XXXXX

Supplemental instructions, such as specific

method(s) of preservation, may be added as
appropriate.

In the absence of an applicable procedural

specification, enter descriptive packaging
instructions in-the-clear using a maximum of 59
characters.

The following are examples of data entry:

(a) APPLY PRESERVE 0/2 ON BARE AREA.

(Note that code for appropriate preservative is
selected from table J-III)

114
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-III. Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326 – Continued.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
22-80 (b) CUSHION ENDS WITH BG. (Note that
(Cont.) code for appropriate material is selected from
table J-V.)

(c) PLACE DIPSTICK IN BE BAG AND

SECURE TO VALVE. (The code for
appropriate bag is selected from table J-VII.)

(d) PLACE "XX" UNITS OF DESICCANT IN

UNIT CONTAINER. (Note that appropriate
units of desiccant are determined per paragraph
5.2.3.7.b.)

115
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E

TABLE E-IV. Special packaging instruction data for PART D of DD Form 2326.

Column
Element of Data Explanation or Instructions
Number
1 Document identifier Enter "D" to identify special packaging instruction
data.
2-6 Reserved for system document control and
identification numbers and applicable prefix
designations.
7-21 National stock Show the identification number assigned to the item
number of supply (7-10 for Federal Supply Classification
code; 11-19 for National Item Identification
Number; when specified, 20-21 for Material
Management Aggregation Code (MMAC), Service
Management Code or Special Material Identification
Code (SMIC).
22-26 Packaging design Enter the 5-digit numerical CAGE code of the
activity code packaging design activity, assigned in conformance
identification number with Cataloging Handbook H4/H8.
27-36 SPI number Enter the SPI number provided by the service or
agency. In column 27, one of the following alpha
characters will be used:
A - Army M – Marine Corps
D - DLA N – Navy
F - Air Force
37 Revision Enter the revision symbol as an alphabetic character
beginning with an "A" for the first revision, then
proceeding through the alphabet for each succeeding
revision, except do not use I, O, Q, S, X and Z.
38-40 Not used
41-45 SPI date Enter the ordinal date, reflecting the two-position
year and three-position day of the last revision of the
SPI (for example, April 15, 2003 would be
"03105"). Do not use spaces or dashes.
46-61 Container NSN Show the National Stock Number of the long-life
container required, if applicable.
62-80 Not used

116
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX E
APPRO VAL ST AM P
FO RM APPRO VED
P R E S E R V A T IO N A N D P A C K IN G D A T A O M B N o . 0 7 0 4 -0 1 8 8

NO M ENC LAT URE D E S IG N A C T IV IT Y 'S P A R T N U M B E R

M A N U F A C T U R E R 'S C A G E C O D E C O N F IG U R A T IO N IT E M S P E C IF IC A T IO N N U M B E R

IT E M ID E N T IF IC A T IO N D A T A (P A R T A )

N A T IO N A L S T O C K N U M B E R IT E M W E IG H T LENGTH W ID T H DEPTH CAT

DO C CON
FSC N IIN AD DL POUNDS 1 0 th IN C H E S 1 0 th IN C H E S 1 0 th IN C H E S 1 0 th P /C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

CODE
P
QUP IC Q CAG E D R A W IN G O R P A R T N U M B E R
I
W SF P

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

P R E S E R V A T IO N - P A C K IN G D A T A (P A R T B )

N A T IO N A L S T O C K N U M B E R
PRES PRES W RAP CUSH C U N IT
DO C CON C
METH MTL MTL DUNN T CONT
FSC N IIN AD DL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

IN T U SPEC P A C K IN G U N IT P A C K W T U N IT P A C K S IZ E (IN .) U N IT P A C K C U B E (C U .F T .) O
C P PI
CTR L MKG A B M IN W E IG H T (L B S .) 1 0 th LENGTH 1 0 th W ID T H 1 0 th DEPTH 1 0 th W HOLE CUBE 1 0 0 0 th I

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

S U P P L E M E N T A L D A T A (P A R T C )

N A T IO N A L S T O C K N U M B E R
DO C CON S U P P L E M E N T A L IN S T R U C T IO N S
FSC N IIN ADD L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

S U P P L E M E N T AL IN S T R U C T IO N S
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

S P E C IA L P A C K A G IN G IN S T R U C T IO N D A T A (P A R T D )

N AT IO N AL S T O C K N U M B E R R
P K G D E S IG N
DO C CON SPI NUM BER E
AC T C AG E
FSC N IIN AD D L V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

C O N T A IN E R N AT IO N AL S T O C K N U M B E R
S P I D AT E
FSC N IIN AD D L

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

D D F O R M 2 326 , S E P 9 7 P R E V IO U S E D IT IO N S A R E O B S O L E T E .
S /N : 0 10 2-L F -114 -70 00

FIGURE E-1. Preservation and Packing Data.

117
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

118
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX F

MILITARY PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION PROVISIONS

F.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the procedure for conducting appropriate tests to validate
specific military package designs when such testing is required (see 5.6). This appendix is a
mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance, as
applicable.

F.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

F.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections F.3, F.4,
and F.5 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this
list, document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements of documents
cited in sections F.3, F.4, and F.5 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

F.2.2 Government documents.

F.2.2.1 Standards. The following standard forms a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of this document are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-1660 - Design Criteria for Ammunition Unit Loads.

(Copies of this document are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch or

http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

F.2.2.2 Other Government documents. The following other Government documents

form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the
issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

29 CFR - Labor
40 CFR - Protection of Environment
49 CFR - Transportation

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr or from

the Superintendent of Documents, U.S Government Printing Office, North Capital & H Streets,
N.W., Washington, DC 20402.)
119
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX F

F.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these
documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

INTERNATIONAL DOCUMENTS

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)

Dangerous Goods Regulations

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)

International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code

(These publications are normally available from the organizations that prepare or
distribute the documents. They may also be available in or through libraries or other
informational services and from commercial booksellers.)

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM-D4169 - Standard Practice for Performance Testing of Shipping

Containers and Systems (DoD adopted).

(Copies of this document are available online at http://www.astm.org or from ASTM

International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

F.3 GENERAL

F.3.1 Packaging design validation tests. Except for hazardous materials package testing,
packaging design validation tests shall consist of the following tests and examinations in
sequence:

a. The applicable performance tests of ASTM-D4169

b. The applicable preservation inspections of Appendix G

120
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX F

F.3.2 Hazardous material. Testing of hazardous material packages shall be in

accordance with the applicable requirements for performance packaging contained in the
International Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations or the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code, and with the Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title 40, and Title 49. These test results shall be documented as
specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).

F.3.3 Ammunition unit loads. Ammunition unit load test requirements are stated in
MIL-STD-1660.

F.4 TEST METHODS

F.4.1 Container performance tests. The container shall be subjected to the tests specified
for Distribution Cycle 18 of ASTM-D4169 and the following Assurance Levels:

a. For Level A packs – Assurance Level 1.

b. For Level B packs – Assurance Level 2.

F.4.2 Preservation tests. Preservation tests shall be in accordance with G.4.

F.5 OTHER

F.5.1 Acceptance criteria and disposition of test samples. Procedures as specified in

ASTM-D4169 for Government shipments shall apply.

121
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX F

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

122
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS

G.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the requirements for conducting appropriate quality
conformance inspection tests on all military packages delivered under the provisions of this
standard. This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein
is intended for compliance, as applicable.

G.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

G.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections G.3 and G.4
of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements of documents cited
in sections G.3 and G.4 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

G.2.2 Government documents.

G.2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards form a
part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of
these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION

A-A-3174 - Plastic Sheet, Polyolefin.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-PRF-121 - Barrier Materials, Greaseproof, Waterproof,

Flexible, Heat-Sealable.
MIL-PRF-131 - Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof,
Greaseproof, Flexible, Heat Sealable.
MIL-D-16791 - Detergents, General Purpose (Liquid,
Nonionic).
MIL-PRF-22019 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible,
Sealable, Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor
Treated.
MIL-B-22020 - Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.
MIL-PRF-22191 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible,
Heat-Sealable.

123
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-129 - Military Marking for Shipment and Storage.

MIL-STD-3010 - Test Procedures for Packaging Materials.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch

or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

G.3 GENERAL

G.3.1 Quality system. The contractor's quality system shall be as specified in the
contract.

G.3.2 Quality assurance requirements. Quality assurance requirements shall be in

accordance with the contract. In addition, the applicable tests in G.4 and G.5 are mandatory.

G.3.3 Sampling.

G.3.3.1 Lot size. An inspection lot shall consist of all items manufactured during one
production run and packaged by the same process using the same packaging materials.

G.3.3.2 Sampling for inspection. Completed packs shall be withdrawn from each lot in a
random manner to make a representative sample sufficient in size to conduct all applicable
inspections and tests as specified in G.4 and G.5.

G.4 PRESERVATION INSPECTIONS

G.4.1 Visual preservation examinations. Visually examine all test packages to determine
compliance with the requirements of this standard. Specific defects that indicate quality
problems are listed in table G-I.

G.4.2 Leakage test. Requirements for this inspection are based on the method of
preservation utilized in the packaging process. Applicable methods of preservation are listed in

124
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

table G-II. When applicable, the unit pack should be tested for leaks in accordance with one of
the following techniques (tests) of Method 5009, MIL-STD-3010. Containers, wraps and
cushioning used outside the waterproof or watervaporproof carrier shall be removed prior to
testing. The time that the item and all processing materials have been maintained at ambient
conditions prior to or during the processing period may be considered a part of the conditioning
time.

G.4.2.1 Wetting agent. As an alternative to the use of the aerosol solution recommended
by Method 5009 of MIL-STD-3010, a solution of 4 grams of water-soluble detergent,
conforming to Type I of MIL-D-16791, per gallon of test water may be used to release entrapped
air so that actual leakage of air through the barrier may be detected.

G.4.2.2 Selection of technique. The most appropriate technique will depend principally
upon the construction, size and weight of the unit pack and the information needed. The hot
water technique is appropriate for large unit packs. The squeeze technique is appropriate for
small unit packs constructed of flexible materials such as plastic film. The vacuum retention
technique does not specifically locate leaks and may not indicate the existence of tiny leaks in a
large unit pack. The submersion (or immersion) technique for detecting water leakage is not as
sensitive as the air leakage tests, but it is appropriate to reveal whether or not water might leak
into the unit packs and, depending upon the duration of the test, gives some indication of the
extent to which the materials used in the pack are waterproof. The pneumatic pressure technique
is primarily appropriate for rigid containers. Neither the hot water nor the pneumatic pressure
techniques are appropriate for rigid containers that are sealed with tapes; the submersion
technique must be used.

G.4.2.2.1 Vacuum retention technique.

G.4.2.2.1.1 Sealed rigid container. When the air in the sealed system has been
evacuated to a constant specified pressure, allow the sealed system to remain undisturbed for 10
minutes. Note the pressure on the vacuum pressure gage. Loss of vacuum shall not exceed
twenty-five percent of the original vacuum.

G.4.2.2.1.2 Sealed flexible bag. Sufficient air shall be drawn from the bag to cause the
bag material to cling snugly to the enclosed item. Allow the bag to remain undisturbed for two
hours at ambient temperature. Grasp the bag and draw it away from the item; then release it
quickly. The bag shall remain taut and cling to the item. The loss of vacuum shall not cause the
flexible bag to lose its tautness.

125
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

G.4.2.2.2 Submersion (or immersion) technique. After submersion and before opening
the sealed system, carefully dry the outside. Open the sealed system and note whether leakage
has occurred. There shall be no evidence of moisture within the bag.

G.4.2.2.3 Pneumatic pressure technique. When the sealed system is pressurized to a

constant specified pressure and the line to the compressed air supply is closed, read and record
the initial pressure. After thirty minutes, read and record the final gage pressure. There shall be
no loss of gage pressure. When a water solution or immersion procedure is used or when
required to pinpoint leaks, coat surfaces with a soap solution or submerge the system under
water. There shall be no evidence of air leakage indicated by soap bubbles increasing in size,
being blown away be escaping air, or by the presence of a steady stream of bubbles from any
surface.

G.4.2.2.4 Hot water technique. All samples shall be conditioned at ambient conditions at
least four hours prior to performing this test. Observe evolution of air bubbles at each position
of the sample. There shall not be a steady stream or recurring succession of bubbles from any
surface or seam. Bubbles which appear on the surface of the unit pack but are not released or are
released at a slowly decreasing rate are not to be construed as indication of failure.

G.4.2.2.5 Squeeze technique (applicable only to flexible specimens). During sealing, as

much air as possible shall be entrapped within the flexible bag at ambient conditions. When the
bag is squeezed to increase the internal air pressure of the container, there shall not be a steady
stream or recurring succession of bubbles from any surface or seam.

G.4.3 Heat-sealed seam test. Requirements for conducting the test are also based on the
method of preservation utilized in the packaging process. Applicable methods of preservation
are listed in table G-II.

G.4.3.1 Selection of samples for heat-sealed seam tests. Sections of the heat seals shall
be obtained from sealed unit packs. Only one heat seal specimen shall be obtained from one
sealed unit pack.

G.4.3.1.1 Alternate sampling procedure for heat-sealed seam test. When heat seals are
made with equipment designed to control the temperature, dwell time and pressure, test samples
may be prepared from specimen heat seals in lieu of taking samples directly from heat sealed
packs as specified in G.4.3.1. Specimen heat seals shall all be prepared daily prior to production
from sample(s) of each material sealed on each sealing device. Machine settings used in
production shall be identical with the settings used in fabrication of test specimens. In cases
where any of the alternately prepared heat seal specimens fail the seam strength test, tests of heat

126
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

seals from actual unit packs shall be performed as necessary to assure that unit pack seals meet
the requirements of G.4.3.2.

G.4.3.2 Performance of heat-sealed seam test. The heat-sealed seam test shall be
performed in accordance with Method 2024 of MIL-STD-3010, at normal room (ambient)
temperature using the static load weight as specified therein, except that when barrier materials
conform to MIL-PRF-121 or MIL-PRF-22019, Type I, the static load weight shall be 36 ± 2
ounces. When barrier materials conform to A-A-3174, MIL-PRF-131 or MIL-PRF-22191, the
static load weight shall be 50 ounces ± 2 ounces. A five percent reduction in static load weight
is permitted when the room temperature in the test area exceeds 90°F. Heat seals shall not
separate during the final three minutes of the test. Partial separation in the area of partial fusion
adjacent to the actual seal is acceptable within the first two minutes of the test.

G.5 PACKING INSPECTIONS

G.5.1 Examination procedures. Each sample intermediate or shipping container shall be

visually inspected for the following deficiencies:

Container material(s) not as specified.

Container construction not as specified.
Container size not as specified.
Closure material(s) not as specified.
Closure locations not as specified.
Markings incomplete.
Markings illegible.
Markings incorrectly located.

127
 TABLE G-I. Preservation inspection provisions.

Method of Method
Criteria Inspection 10 20 31 32 33 41 42 43 44 45 51 52 53 54 55
Cleaning materials not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Cleaning material contaminated Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item not completely cleaned when tested in accordance
with Note 1 Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item damaged by action of cleaning process Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item contaminated by handling after cleaning Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item not completely dry Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item damaged by compressed air blast or overheating Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Contaminated compressed air used Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Contaminated wiping cloths used Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Preservative not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Incomplete or non-uniform coverage of preservative Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Excessive preservative Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Item not thoroughly drained Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Wrap not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Cushioning material not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

MIL-STD-2073-1D
Cushioning thickness not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

APPENDIX G
Projections and sharp edges of item not sufficiently cushioned
to prevent damage to item or external media Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
128

Improper application of cushioning, blocking, bracing or bolting

Bolting Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Improper amount of desiccant Visual X X X X X
Desiccant improperly secured Visual X X X X X
Desiccant contacting item Visual X X X X X
Humidity indicator not properly placed Visual X X X X X
Window or gaskets not as specified Visual X X
Unit container not as specified Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Interior unit container corners not blunted Visual X X X
Insufficient material for reclosure of flexible barriers Visual X X X
Improper seal or closure of unit containers Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Excessive air within unit container Visual X X X X X X X X X
Excessive looseness in unit container Shake X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Weight and dimensions of unit pack exceeds maximum Weigh &
measure X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Incorrect QUP Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Marking omitted, incorrect, or illegible 2/ 3/ 4/ Visual X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
NOTES:
1/ Visual examination for cleanliness shall be performed using a daylight fluorescent tube light source having an 18-inch length (min) and 30 watts (min). The inside surface of the reflector shall be finished
in white. The light source shall also be capable of directing light at any angle. All item surfaces, depressions, inside corners and crevices shall be examined for dirt, corrosion, oil, grease or similar
foreign residues. Various angles of incident light shall be used while looking for foreign matter. Record whether or not foreign matter was observed.
2/ For methods 42 and 52, unit pack marking of MIL-STD-129 shall be applied to the barrier bag as well as the outer container.
3/ When a box or container is used to effect the unit pack of methods 31, 33, 41 and 51, unit pack markings of MIL-STD-129 shall be applied to the barrier bag as well as the box specified
to effect the unit pack.
4/ When the unit pack is also used as the shipping container, then the markings applicable for shipment shall be applied to the exterior container in accordance with MIL-STD-129.

128
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

TABLE G-II. Leakage and heat-sealed seam test provisions.

Heat-sealed
Method or Submethod Leak Test
seam test
(See G.4.2)
(See G.4.3)
31 Required Required 1/
32 Required Required
33 Required Required 1/
41 Required Required
42 Required Required
43 Required Required
44 Required --
45 Required --
51 Required Required
52 Required Required
53 Required Required
54 Required --
55 Required --

NOTES:

1/ A cold-sealed seam test as defined in MIL-B-22020 shall be substituted in cases

where a VCI treated cold-sealed bag is employed as the unit container.

129
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX G

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

130
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX H

PROCEDURES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH CONTAINER

DESIGN RETRIEVAL SYSTEM (CDRS) REQUIREMENTS

H.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the procedures to be followed to insure compliance with
the requirements of the Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). This appendix is a
mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance, as
applicable.

H.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.

This section is not applicable to this appendix.

H.3 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS.

H.3.1 Design search request submittal. After the development activity has established a
requirement for a specialized container, the configuration of the contents is reasonably firm, and
protection levels have been tentatively established, CDRS services shall be solicited before
initiating detailed engineering design of the needed container. The development activity shall:
(1) identify packaging requirements for which a specialized reusable container is required, (2)
prepare a search request, and (3) submit the search request to the CDRS Management Office
(MO), 688 ARSS/DO, 615 Apalachicola Rd, Eglin AFB, FL 32542. DoD in-house container
development activities shall submit the search request directly to the CDRS Office. DoD
contractors must submit copies of search requests to their respective contract administrative
office and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).

H.3.2 CDRS Office search response. The CDRS MO will identify reusable specialized
container designs and assets suitable to fulfill the requirements of the development activity. The
CDRS MO will provide technical guidance on the use of a design(s) retrieved from the CDRS
data base and considered technically/logistically suitable to satisfy the new requirement. The
CDRS MO will also determine whether or not container assets (conforming to the retrieved
design(s)) are available for use in the new program and provide applicable inventory
management information to the development activity. The CDRS MO response will be
submitted to the requester within 60 days after receipt of the search request and descriptive data.
The contractor shall, unless otherwise authorized, withhold container development for the item
involved pending receipt of the CDRS search response.

131
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX H

H.3.3 Design activity action on CDRS Office response. Upon receipt of response from
CDRS MO, the design activity shall initiate appropriate action based upon the CDRS MO
proposal and the terms of the contract. Contractor interactions with the government shall be
through the Administrative Contracting Officer (and the Acquiring Contracting Officer where
appropriate) to ensure that all changes are accomplished in strict accordance with applicable
contract terms. Under no circumstances may response from CDRS MO only, without firm
direction from the Acquiring Contracting Officer, be interpreted as an instruction from the
government to change contract terms or to do work beyond that which is explicitly specified in
the contract.

H.3.3.1 Negative response from CDRS Office. If response is negative, the design
activity shall complete the allocated baseline for the needed container and, if the end item
hardware is to be delivered under the contract, shall proceed with the design, required test and
evaluation, and documentation of the new specialized reusable container design in time to meet
contract obligations.

H.3.3.1.1 Submittal of container design data. Upon completion of a new or modified

container design, including any required testing and documentation, the design activity shall
submit design data to CDRS MO for incorporation into the CDRS data base, as specified on the
Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).

H.3.3.2 Positive response from CDRS Office. When a potentially suitable design(s) is
provided by the CDRS MO, the development activity shall obtain (from the cognizant
engineering activity) additional data on the proposed design(s) that may be required, and
complete an engineering analysis to the extent necessary to determine the feasibility of using the
proposed design(s). If a determination is made that the proposed design(s) is not suitable, the
development activity shall justify nonselection of the proposed design to the program office,
with a copy to CDRS. The cost analysis shall include consideration of the use of any surplus
container assets that may be available. If the development activity is a contractor, the approval
of the Acquiring Contracting MOs shall be obtained prior to initiation of a new container
development effort.

H.3.3.2.1 Item (Inventory) manager notification. Whenever application of the foregoing

procedures produces a potential usage for a container already in the DoD inventory, the design
activity (through the Administrative Contracting Officer, if a contractor) shall promptly notify
the designated inventory (item) manager of such potential usage, inquire as to actual availability
of the containers and request a freeze on disposal of these assets.

132
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX H

H.3.3.2.2 Container design agent notification. Where a reusable container design is to be

used for a new or existing end item, the design agent for that container shall be promptly
informed to ensure that this usage is properly recorded and to ensure adequate configuration
management coordination and control in the future. This requirement extends to individual piece
parts of the container which are being used as-is in the new design and a new drawing is not
being made.

133
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX H

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

134
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENT CODES

J.1 SCOPE. This appendix establishes and defines codes to be used in describing military
packaging methods and materials when developing packaging data as prescribed in Appendix E.
This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended
for compliance.

J.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

J.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in section J.4 of this
appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list, document
users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements of documents cited in section
J.4 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.

J.2.2 Government documents.

J.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and handbooks. The following specifications and

standards form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise
specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS

QQ-A-1876 - Aluminum Foil.

UU-B-36 - Bags, Paper, Grocers.
MMM-A-260 - Adhesive, Water-Resistant (For Sealing Waterproofed
Paper).
PPP-B-566 - Boxes, Folding, Paperboard.
PPP-B-585 - Boxes, Wood, Wirebound.
PPP-B-676 - Boxes, Setup.
PPP-B-1055 - Barrier Material, Waterproof, Flexible.
PPP-B-1672 - Boxes, Shipping, Reusable With Cushioning.
PPP-C-96 - Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter.
PPP-C-795 - Cushioning Material, Packaging (Flexible Closed Cell
Plastic Film for Long Distribution Cycles).
PPP-C-850 - Cushioning Material, Polystyrene Expanded, Resilient (for
Packaging Uses).

135
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

PPP-C-1120 - Cushioning Material, Uncompressed Bound Fiber for

Packaging.
PPP-C-1797 - Cushioning Material, Resilient, Low Density, Unicellular,
Polypropylene Foam.
PPP-T-495 - Tubes, Mailing and Filing

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

A-A-203 - Paper, Kraft, Untreated.

A-A-1051 - Paperboard, Wrapping and Cushioning.
A-A-1249 - Paper, Wrapping, Tissue.
A-A-1507 - Chipboard.
A-A-1898 - Cushioning Material, Cellulosic, Packaging.
A-A-3129 - Cushioning Material, Flexible Open Cell Plastic Film (for
Packaging Applications).
A-A-3174 - Plastic Sheet, Polyolefin.
A-A-50177 - Paper, Lens.
A-A-59135 - Packaging Material, Sheet
A-A-59136 - Cushioning Material, Packaging, Closed Cell Foam Plank.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-C-104 - Crates, Wood: Lumber and Plywood Sheathed, Nailed, and

Bolted.
MIL-DTL-117 - Bags, Heat Sealable.
MIL-PRF-121 - Barrier Materials, Greaseproof, Waterproof, Flexible, Heat-
Sealable.
MIL-P-130 - Paper, Wrapping, Laminated and Creped.
MIL-PRF-131 - Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof, Greaseproof, Flexible,
Heat-Sealable.
MIL-P-149 - Plastic Coating Compound, Strippable (Hot Dipping).
MIL-DTL-2427 - Box, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Nailed.
MIL-PRF-3150 - Lubricating Oil, Preservative, Medium.
MIL-PRF-3420 - Packaging Materials, Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor, Treated,
Opaque.
MIL-C-3774 - Crates, Wood; Open 12,000- and 16,000-Pound Capacity.
MIL-D-6054 - Drum, Metal - Shipping and Storage.

136
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

MIL-D-6055 - Drum, Metal Reusable, Shipping and Storage (Cap. 88 to

510 cubic inches).
MIL-DTL-6060 - Bags, Watervaporproof, Heat-Sealable, Complex.
MIL-PRF-6081 - Lubricating Oil, Jet Engine.
MIL-PRF-6085 - Lubricating Oil: Instrument, Aircraft, Low Volatility.
MIL-C-6529 - Corrosion Preventive, Aircraft Engine.
MIL-PRF-7808 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic Base.
MIL-PRF-7870 - Lubricating Oil: General Purpose, Low Temperature.
MIL-PRF-8188 - Corrosion-Preventive Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine,
Synthetic Base.
MIL-C-9897 - Crate, Slotted Angle, Steel or Aluminum, for Lightweight
Airframe Components and Bulky Items (for Maximum
Loads of 1363 Kgs (3000 Pounds)).
MIL-PRF-10924 - Grease, Automotive and Artillery.
MIL-PRF-11264 - Container: Shipping, Reusable, for Tank Automotive
Engines, Transmissions, Differentials, Transfers, Final
Drives, Drive Axles, and Similar Assemblies.
MIL-C-11796 - Corrosion Preventive Compound, Petrolatum, Hot
Application.
MIL-PRF-16173 - Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback, Cold
Application.
MIL-C-16555 - Coating Compound, Strippable, Sprayable
MIL-DTL-17667 - Paper, Wrapping, Chemically Neutral (Non-Corrosive).
MIL-P-19644 - Plastic Molding Material (Polystyrene Foam, Expanded
Bead).
MIL-PRF-21260 - Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Preservative
Break-In.
MIL-PRF-22019 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile
Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.
MIL-B-22020 - Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile Corrosion
Inhibitor Treated.
MIL-PRF-22191 - Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Heat Sealable.
MIL-PRF-23699 - Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic Base,
NATO Code Number 0-156.
MIL-PRF-23827 - Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, Gear and Actuator Screw.
MIL-PRF-26514 - Polyurethane Foam, Rigid or Flexible; for Packaging.
MIL-PRF-32033 - Lubricating Oil, General Purpose, Preservative (Water-
Displacing, Low Temperature).
MIL-B-43666 - Boxes, Shipping, Consolidation.
MIL-PRF-46002 - Preservative Oil, Contact and Volatile Corrosion-Inhibited.

137
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

MIL-PRF-46010 - Lubricant, Solid Film, Heat Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting.

MIL-PRF-46170 - Hydraulic Fluid, Rust Inhibited, Fire Resistant, Synthetic
Hydrocarbon Base.
MIL-B-46506 - Boxes, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Wirebound.
MIL-P-53030 - Primer Coating, Epoxy, Water Reducible, Lead and
Chromate Free.
MIL-PRF-81322 - Grease, Aircraft, General Purpose, Wide Temperature
Range, NATO Code G-395.
MIL-PRF-81705 - Barrier Materials, Flexible, Electrostatic Protective, Heat
Sealable.
MIL-DTL-81997 - Pouches, Cushioned, Flexible, Electrostatic-Protective,
Transparent.
MIL-PRF-83282 - Hydraulic Fluid, Fire Resistant, Synthetic Hydrocarbon
Base, Metric, NATO Code No. H-537.
MIL-PRF-83671 - Foam-in-Place Packaging Materials, General Specification
for.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-129 - Military Marking for Shipment and Storage.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://assist.daps.dla.mil/quicksearch

or http://assist.daps.dla.mil or from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)

J.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following other
Government documents, drawings, and publications form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the
solicitation or contract.

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

29 CFR - Labor.
40 CFR - Protection of Environment.
49 CFR - Transportation.

(Copies of these documents are available online at www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/ or from

Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, North Capital & H Streets,
N.W., Washington, DC 20402.)

138
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

WARNER ROBINS AIR LOGISTICS CENTER DRAWINGS

11214-5002-100 - Container, Shipping and Storage.

11214-5002-200 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
11214-5002-300 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
11214-5002-400 - Container, Shipping and Storage.

(These drawings may be obtained from WR-ALC/TILAS, 420 Second St., Suite 100,
Robins AFB, GA 31098-1640.)

NAVICP DRAWINGS

P069 - Container, Molded, Reusable.

13414 - Container, Modular, Reusable.
15024 - Container, Shipping and Storage.
15450 - Container, Modular, Reusable

(These drawings may be obtained from NAVICP (Attn: 0712), 700 Robbins Avenue,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.)

J.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of these

documents to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these
documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM-D4169 - Shipping Containers and Systems, Shipping, Performance

Testing of (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D4727 - Fiberboard Sheet Stock (Container Grade) and Cut Shapes,
Corrugated and Solid (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5118 - Boxes, Fiberboard Shipping, Fabrication of (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5168 - Containers, Fabrication and Closure of Triple Wall
Corrugated Fiberboard (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D5486 - Pressure Sensitive Tape for Packaging, Box Closure and
Sealing (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D6039 - Crates, Wood, Open and Covered (DoD adopted).
ASTM-D6251 - Natural Wood-Cleated Panelboard Shipping Boxes.
ASTM-D6256 - Standard Specification for Wood-cleated Shipping Boxes
with Skidded Load Bearing Bases (DoD adopted).

139
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

ASTM-D6880 - Standard Specification for Wood Boxes.

(Copies of these documents are available online at http://www.astm.org or from ASTM

International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)

Dangerous Goods Regulations.

(Copies of this document are available online at www.iata.org or from IATA, 800 Place
Victoria, PO Box 113, Montreal, Quebec, H4Z 1M1.)

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)

International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code.

(Copies of this document are available online at www.imo.org or from IMO, 4 Albert
Embankment, London, SE1 7SR, United Kingdom.)

AEROSPACE INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION (AIA)

NAS847 - Caps and Plugs, Protective, Dust and Moisture Seal.

(Copies of this document are available from Aerospace Industries Association, 1000
Wilson Boulevard, Suite 1700 Arlington, VA 22209-3928.)

J.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

J.3.1 Code system. The codes established in this appendix are used in a position and
sequence system. Coded data used under this system shall appear in the sequence and the
number of positions specified in Appendix E. This system reduces the data to a convenient
format capable of being stored and manipulated by existing automated data processing methods
and equipment or by manual means.

J.3.2 Procedure and responsibilities for revisions. The procedure and responsibilities set
forth below provide a means for incorporating needed additional packaging requirements and
codes into the established tables of this appendix with a minimum of delay. This procedure
applies only to this appendix.

140
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

J.3.2.1 Adding codes. Military agencies requiring the addition of a requirement to the
tables herein shall request the preparing activity to establish a code for the requirement and
publish it in the next regular revision. Requests for additions to the code tables shall include a
justification of use (number of acquisitions per year) and approximate number of items to which
the requirement will apply. Due to the limitations of the code system, new codes will not be
established unless a substantial need is indicated. Copies of all correspondence relative to any
code shall be furnished to the departmental custodians concerned. See Appendix E for use of
supplemental data as a means of establishing requirements in lieu of codes.

J.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

J.4.1 General code requirements. The requirements cited in the tables of this appendix
will be defined by use of the codes associated therewith. When using these codes, a symbol
must be used in each digit position in every field of the total code. To distinguish between
alphabetical and numerical "0" and "00", the numeric characters shall be designated as "0/" and
"0/0/" and the alphabetic characters as "O" and "OO". When none of the requirements of the table
apply, one of the following codes shall be used:

a. Use the numerical code "0/" or "0/0/" (depending on the number of digit spaces in the
code field) to indicate that the field does not apply to the package described by the
code.

b. Use the code "Z" or "ZZ" (depending on the number of digit spaces in the code
field) to indicate that supplementary or special requirements apply which are not
represented by the code symbols. When either of these symbols is used in an
acquisition document, details of the requirement shall be provided with the
document.

J.4.2 Preservation methods. Table J-I lists method of preservation codes as established
by and described in 5.2.3.

J.4.2.1 Specialized preservation. Table J-Ia lists codes for packaging procedures which
are frequently used and would require supplemental data to adequately define the packaging.
Use of the specialized preservation code precludes the need to repetitively develop this data as a
selective item.

141
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

J.4.3 Quantity per unit pack. The quantity per unit pack codes shall be as follows:

Code Quantity
In clear 0/0/1 through 999
BLK Bulk
ZZZ Special requirements – refer to supplemental data, special instructions or
drawings provided.

J.4.4 Cleaning. Table J-II lists cleaning requirement codes in alphanumerical order.

J.4.5 Preservative. Table J-III lists contact preservative material codes in

alphanumerical order. Table J-IIIa lists those codes that directly reference a single specification
in specification number sequence.

J.4.6 Wrapping material. Table J-IV lists wrapping material codes in alphanumerical
order. Table J-IVa lists those codes that directly reference a single specification in specification
number sequence.

J.4.7 Cushioning and dunnage. Table J-V lists cushioning and dunnage material codes
in alphanumerical order. Table J-Va lists those codes that directly reference a single
specification in specification number sequence.

J.4.8 Thickness of cushioning or dunnage. Table J-VI defines the required thickness of
specified cushioning material. See note in Table J-VI for dunnage applications.

J.4.9 Unit and intermediate container. Table J-VII lists the unit and intermediate
container codes in alphanumerical order. Table J-VIIa lists those codes that directly reference a
single specification in specification number sequence.

J.4.9.1 Options. When the selected code allows an option in the selection of the
container, the weight and size limitations of the container specification will apply.

J.4.10 Unit container level and optional procedure indicator codes. Table J-VIII lists
unit container level codes and table J-VIIIa lists optional procedure indicator codes.

142
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

J.4.11 Unit packs per intermediate container. The quantity of unit packs per
intermediate container codes shall be as follows:

Code Quantity
In clear 0/0/0/ through 10/0/
AAA See B.5
XXX See Method of Preservation
ZZZ Special requirement – see specific drawing or instruction provided

J.4.12 Intermediate container. The codes for the intermediate containers are the same
as the codes used to specify the unit containers and are listed in table J-VII.

J.4.12.1 Intermediate container limitations. Refer to B.5.2.

J.4.13 Packing. The codes that indicate the type of shipping container for military
packing are listed in table J-IX for Level A and table J-IXa for Level B packing. Codes for
minimal packing are listed in table J-IXb.

J.4.14 Special markings. Table J-X lists the codes for special markings. The special
markings are considered an integral part of the total pack required to identify and to protect the
contained item during packaging, storage, transit and removal from the pack and must be applied
to the containers according to MIL-STD-129. The codes should be used only as they apply to
items enclosed within the approved packaging and shall be compatible with the prescribed
packaging data.

J.5 CROSS INDEX

J.5.1 Document number to table and code. A cross index that relates each document
listed in Appendix J to the specific table that references the document, and its corresponding
code, may be found in table J-XI.

143
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-I. Methods of preservation codes (see J.4.2).

Superseded codes from:

Code Method
MIL-P-116J MIL-STD-2073-2C
10/ Physical protection III 10/
20/ Preservative coating only I 11
(with greaseproof wrap,
as required)
30 Waterproof protection IC 2Y
31 Waterproof bag, sealed IC-3 2D
32 Container, waterproof bag, IC-2 2M
Sealed
33 Greaseproof-waterproof bag, IC-1 2E
Sealed
40 Watervaporproof protection IA 3Y
41 Watervaporproof bag, sealed IA-8 3G
42 Container, watervaporproof IA-14 3Q
bag, sealed, container
43 Floating watervaporproof bag, IA-16 3H
sealed
44 Rigid container (other than IA-13 3T
metal), sealed
45 Rigid metal container, sealed IA-5 3V
50 Watervaporproof protection II 4Y
with desiccant
51 Watervaporproof bag, sealed IIc 4G
52 Container, watervaporproof IIb 4Q
bag, sealed, container
53 Floating watervaporproof IIa 4H
bag, sealed
54 Rigid container (other than IIf 4T
metal), sealed
55 Rigid metal container, sealed IId 4V
ZZ See J.4.1.b - -

144
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1).

Code Packaging procedure

AE Seal or plug all openings and preserve by Method 10.

AH Preserve Method 20 as follows: Fog spray or flush internally with preservative

indicated by preservation code. All openings shall then be plugged or sealed to
prevent entrance of dirt and moisture. Exterior unpainted ferrous metal surfaces shall
be coated with a suitable paint or enamel, or coated with cold application, nontacky,
corrosion preventive compound conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 4.

AU Preservative compounds shall not be applied to windings, commutators or peripheries

of armatures or rotors. Shafts shall be coated with MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2
preservative and wrapped with MIL-PRF-121 material, secured in place with ASTM-
D5486 tape. Commutators shall be wrapped with MIL-PRF-121 material, held in
place with ASTM-D5486 tape. Exposed surfaces of steel collector rings shall be
coated with MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2 preservative. No preservative is required for
bronze, brass or corrosion resisting metals. All collector rings shall be wrapped with
MIL-PRF-121 material, secured in place with ASTM-D5486 tape. Corrodible
surfaces, except shafts, commutators, and collector rings, may be preserved by the use
of insulating varnish applied during the manufacturing process. In addition to the
foregoing requirements, armatures and rotors shall be wrapped with MIL-PRF-121
material, secured with ASTM-D5486 tape.

AW Preserve in accordance with any of the following alternate methods (used for gaskets
and similar items):

a. Seal in bags conforming to Class B, C or E of MIL-DTL-117, using stiffening

material internally if needed to maintain rigidity.
b. Preservation method 42 or 44.
c. Place between sheet of, or in fold of, corrugated fiberboard of sufficient stiffness
to resist bending, overwrap with waterproof wrapping paper conforming to PPP-
B-1055 and seal with pressure sensitive tape conforming to ASTM-D5486 or
adhesive conforming to MMM-A-260. Authorization to use other waterproof
barrier materials may be granted upon request.

145
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.

Code Packaging procedure

BC Preserve by Method 20 as follows: Coat all pieces of set with preservative
compound conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 4. Wrap or bag each preserved
piece individually in MIL-PRF-121 material. Cushion or segregate individually
wrapped or bagged pieces in the storage container to prevent movement and
possible physical damage. (Segregated identical pieces, such as buckets and seal
strips, are to be kept as close together in the container as possible to facilitate ease
of counting.) Individually preserved, wrapped or bagged pieces need not be
identified since container markings are in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
Itemized packing lists for inclusion within or attachment to the outside of the
container shall be furnished in accordance with MIL-STD-129. The lists shall
show quantity and nomenclature of all items included in the set. (Used for
turbine blade sets and similar items.)

BD Remove parts made of rubber, fiber, or nonmetallic materials adversely affected

by preservative compounds and package by Method 41 without a preservative.
Preserve metal parts of assembly to conform to the requirements of Method 40.
Mark the bag containing nonmetallic parts "Parts for Assembly" and include it
within, or securely attached to, the pack containing metal parts in a manner which
will assure its being found when the pack is opened. (Use for couplings and
similar items.)

BL Plug or seal all openings and preserve using Method 20.

DB Preserve by Method 10 modified as follows: Preserve in transparent barrier bag

made of A-A-3174 or Type III MIL-PRF-22191 material. A-A-3174 or MIL-
PRF-22191, Type III material, A-A-3129 or PPP-C-795 cushioning shall be used
to cushion sharp edges and protrusions of the preserved items. Bag closure shall
be made by any suitable means, except that staples shall not be used. When use
of a bag is not practicable, the item shall be completely wrapped in the above
barrier or cushioning material and secured with pressure sensitive tape. Also, the
use of shaped or molded packs utilizing MIL-PRF-22191 or A-A-3174 materials
in conjunction with plastic coated board is acceptable provided the pack's cube is
not increased and the pack meets the tests specified in Appendix G. Strip or
block form of multiple packages shall incorporate provisions for separating unit
quantities.

146
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.

Code Packaging procedure

DC Preserve by Method 20 modified as follows: Preserve in a transparent barrier wrap
made of Type II, MIL-PRF-22191 barrier material, or bag conforming to Type II,
Class C, Style 2 of MIL-DTL-117. MIL-PRF-22191, Type II barrier material shall
be used to cushion sharp edges and protrusions of item to prevent bag puncture. A-
A-3129 or PPP-C-795 may also be used to cushion sharp edges and protrusions if
item is first wrapped in MIL-PRF-22191, Type II barrier material. The bag closure
shall be made by any suitable means, except that staples shall not be used. Also, the
use of shaped, preformed or molded packages utilizing MIL-PRF-22191 or A-A-
3174 materials in conjunction with plastic coated board is acceptable, provided that
the package cube is not increased and materials are compatible with preservative
specified. However, these packages shall be capable of meeting the tests specified
in Appendix G. Strip or block form of multiple packages shall incorporate
provisions for separating unit quantities.

DR Preserve by Method 30 as follows: Each unit shall have all internal fluid-carrying
passages, which are not prelubricated, filled with the specified preservative,
allowing space for internal thermal expansion. If filling is not practical, the unit
shall be internally fog-sprayed or flushed, then drained to the drip point. All ports,
fittings, openings, etc., shall be capped or plugged with noncorrosive (non-
interacting) metal caps or plugs conforming to NAS 847 or equivalent. All
hydraulic preservative operating fluid used shall be filtered through a 3 micron
absolute filter prior to being used as specified above. Exterior bare metal surfaces,
subject to corrosion, shall be coated with compound conforming to MIL-PRF-
16173, Grade 2 or MIL-C-11796, Class 3. Unit shall be wrapped with a
greaseproof wrap conforming to MIL-PRF-121 or equivalent; seal seams with
ASTM-D5486 tape to effect a measure of waterproofness and prevent unwrapping.
The unit must be adequately cushioned with material specified and placed in a grade
V3c container fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118 (as a minimum), Style
FOL or CSSC. All seams, corners, and manufacturer's joint shall be tape-sealed
with two inch tape conforming to ASTM-D5486, Type III or IV.

147
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.

Code Packaging procedure

DW Preserve by Method 52 as follows: Item shall be cleaned, wrapped, blocked and
braced in an interior carton fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, Class
domestic. MIL-PRF-131 barrier material, sealed as required, shall be utilized
around the first container. The cushioning, to be specified under the cushioning
code and in the thickness required to adequately protect the item, shall be placed
between the barrier and the outer container.

EK Preserve by Method 10 as follows: Each bolt shall have the shank and threads
protected by means of a sleeve extending over the full length of the shank and
thread. The sleeve shall be manufactured from paperboard, asphalt impregnated
chipboard, or spiral wrap of kraft paper over chipboard, lined with material
conforming to MIL-PRF-121. Plastic sleeve coverings may also be used.

GS Preserve by Method 33 (modified) in a transparent, flexible, sealable, volatile

corrosion inhibitor treated bag conforming to MIL-B-22020. The interleaf
furnished inside each Class 2, cold sealable bag shall be withdrawn after inserting
item and prior to final sealing in accordance with MIL-B-22020. Items with
sharp edges or protrusions shall be wrapped with sufficient layers of transparent,
flexible, pressure (cold) sealable volatile corrosion inhibitor barrier material
conforming to MIL-PRF-22019, Type II to prevent bag puncture. The latex
coated (nonprinted) side of the barrier material shall always be facing the item.
Alternately, the item may be completely wrapped with transparent, flexible,
pressure (cold) sealable volatile corrosion inhibitor barrier material conforming
to MIL-PRF-22019, Type II as indicated above and further preserved in a
transparent barrier bag conforming to Type II, Class C, Style 2 of MIL-DTL-117.
Closure shall be by heat-sealing when this alternate method is used. In addition
to markings required elsewhere in the contract, unit identification and caution
labels shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.

GX Preserve by Method 41 as follows: Items subject to damage by electromagnetic

and electrostatic field forces shall be initially wrapped in material conforming to
MIL-PRF-81705, Type III, or bags conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class
H, Style 2, or cushioned in material conforming to A-A-3129 or PPP-C-795,
Class 2 or PPP-C-1797, Type II, to prevent bag puncture, and unit packed in a
heat-sealed bag conforming to MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1.
Reclosable cushioned pouches conforming to MIL-DTL-81997, Type I or II, may

148
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.

Code Packaging procedure

be used in lieu of initial wrap or cushioning. Lead or terminal configurations for
all items shall be maintained as manufactured without causing loads or stresses
capable of causing damage to the item. Materials used to maintain item position
and lead or terminal configuration shall permit item removal without damage to
the item. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive caution labels shall be applied
in accordance with MIL-STD-129. Connectors and plugs (power or data) shall be
covered with conductive caps/plugs.

HM Packaging and marking for hazardous materials shall comply with applicable
requirements for Performance Oriented Packaging contained in the International
Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations or the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG) and with Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title 40 and Title 49. All performance test
requirements shall be supported by certificates and reports attesting to the date
and the results obtained from performance oriented packaging testing. The
contractor, if not a self-certifier, shall be responsible for assuring that third party
sources providing performance testing services are, in fact, registered with the
Department of Transportation. The contractor's signed certification that the
packaged configuration meets IATA or IMDG requirements shall be incorporated
on the DD Form 250, Material Inspection and Receiving Report, and other related
acceptance document if the DD Form 250 is not used. All certificates and reports
shall be available for inspection by authorized Government representatives for a
period of three years.

JF Preserve by Method 10 – Items shall be preserved in a vacuum formed skin pack,

formed from either cellulose acetate, cellulose butyrate or cellulose propionate.
The material shall be 10 to 15 mils minimum thickness prior to draw and 2 to 4
mils thickness after draw. Class domestic fiberboard meeting the requirements of
ASTM-D4727 shall be used as a stiffener.

149
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.

Code Packaging procedure

KF Clean each item in accordance with any applicable process. Use non-corrosive
material to plug any crevices, holes or cavities. Preserve by directly applying
strippable, plastic coating compound (hot dipping) conforming to MIL-P-149 or
equivalent to the clean dry metal surface of the item. Apply the compound in
such a way that upon removal, no compound will be retained in the voids. The
compound shall be a Type II, transparent, cellulose acetate butyrate variety.

Apply as many layers of the plastic coating compound as necessary to protect the
item from contact damage and to seal it from moisture. Wrap the individually
coated items in MIL-PRF-121 greaseproof, waterproof, barrier material. (Use on
labyrinth rings and similar items in sets.)

150
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-II. Cleaning procedure codes (see J.4.4).

Code Procedure
1 Any suitable process that is not injurious to the item.
Z Special requirements - See specific instructions or drawings provided.
0/ No requirement.

151
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-III. Contact preservative material codes (see J.4.5).

Code Material
0/1 MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 1, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application,
hard film
0/2 MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application,
soft film
0/3 MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 3, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application,
water displacing soft film
0/6 MIL-C-11796, Class 3, light preservative compound, soft film, hot application
0/7 MIL-PRF-3150, medium preservative oil, cold application
0/9 MIL-PRF-32033, lubricating oil, general purpose preservative (water displacing, low
temperature)
10/ MIL-PRF-21260, preservative and break-in lubricating oil, internal combustion
engine, Grade 10, 30 or 50
11 MIL-PRF-23827, grease, aircraft and instrument, gear and actuator screw
12 MIL-PRF-81322, grease, aircraft, general purpose
13 MIL-PRF-10924, grease, automotive and artillery
15 MIL-PRF-46170, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, rust inhibited, fire resistant
17 MIL-PRF-6085, lubricating oil, instrument, aircraft, low volatility
19 MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 4, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application,
transparent, non-tacky
20/ MIL-PRF-46002, preservative oil, contact and volatile corrosion inhibited
21 MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 5, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, water displacing
soft film, low pressure steam removable
30/ MIL-PRF-46010, corrosion inhibiting lubricant, solid film, heat cured
31 MIL-C-6529, Type II, corrosion preventive, ready mixed, for reciprocating aircraft
engines
32 MIL-C-6529, Type III, corrosion preventive, ready mixed, for turbojet aircraft
engines
33 MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines
38 MIL-P-149, strippable plastic coating (hot dipping)
49 Vendor's protective grease or oil coating
50/ MIL-PRF-7870, lubricating oil, low temperature
51 MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil, jet engine, Grade 1010
52 MIL-PRF-8188, corrosion preventive oil, synthetic base, for aircraft gas turbine
engines
56 MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines

152
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-III. Contact preservative material codes (see J.4.5) – Continued.

Code Material
65 MIL-PRF-83282, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, fire retardant
80/ MIL-P-53030, primer coating, epoxy, water reducible
89 Preserve with normal operating lubricant
ZZ Special requirement – See specific instructions or drawings provided
0/0/ No requirement

153
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IIIa. Contact preservative material codes in

specification sequence (see J.4.5).

Specification Code
MIL-P-149, strippable plastic coating (hot dipping). 38
MIL-PRF-3150, medium preservative oil, cold application. 0/7
MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil, jet engine, Grade 1010. 51
MIL-PRF-6085, lubricating oil, instrument, aircraft, low volatility. 17
MIL-C-6529, Type II, corrosion preventive, ready-mixed, for reciprocating aircraft 31
engines.
MIL-C-6529, Type III, corrosion preventive, ready-mixed, for turbo-jet aircraft 32
engines.
MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines. 33
MIL-PRF-7870, lubricating oil, low temperature. 50/
MIL-PRF-8188, corrosion preventive oil, synthetic base, for aircraft gas turbine 52
engines.
MIL-PRF-10924, grease, automotive and artillery. 13
MIL-C-11796, Class 3, light preservative, soft film, hot application. 0/6
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 1, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application, 0/1
hard film.
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application, 0/2
soft film.
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 3, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application, 0/3
water displacing soft film.
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 4, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application, 19
transparent, non-tacky.
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 5, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application, 21
water displacing soft film, low pressure steam removable.
MIL-PRF-21260, preservative and break-in lubricating oil, internal combustion 10/
engine, Grade 10, 30 or 50.
MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines. 56
MIL-PRF-23827, grease, aircraft and instrument. 11
MIL-PRF-32033, light lubricating and preservative oil, water displacing, low 09
Temperature
MIL-P-46002, preservative, volatile corrosion inhibited. 20/
MIL-L-46010, corrosion inhibiting lubricant, solid film, heat cured. 30/
MIL-H-46170, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, rust inhibited, fire resistant. 15
MIL-P-53030, primer coating, epoxy, water reducible. 80/

154
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IIIa. Contact preservative material codes in

specification sequence (see J.4.5) – Continued.

Specification Code
MIL-PRF-81322, grease, general purpose, aircraft. 12
MIL-PRF-83282, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, fire retardant. 65

155
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IV. Wrapping material codes (see J.4.6).

Code Material
BA QQ-A-1876, aluminum foil
CA A-A-203, kraft wrapping paper
DA A-A-1249, paper, tissue
EA MIL-DTL-17667, neutral wrapping paper
EB MIL-DTL-17667, Type I, neutral wrapping paper, flat
EC MIL-DTL-17667, Type II, neutral wrapping paper, creped
FA MIL-P-130, laminated and creped wrapping paper
GB MIL-PRF-121, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
GC MIL-PRF-121, Type I, medium duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
GH MIL-PRF-121, Type II, light duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
JA A-A-3174, plastic sheet, polyolefin, 2 mil
JL MIL-PRF-22019, transparent volatile corrosion inhibitor treated barrier material
JV MIL-PRF-22191, Type III, transparent waterproof barrier material
K3 MIL-PRF-81705, Type III, Class 1, transparent, electrostatic protective, static
shielding, barrier material or MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class H, Style 2 bag
LA A-A-50177, lens paper
MB MIL-PRF-3420, volatile corrosion inhibitor treated material
ZZ Special requirements – see specific instructions or drawings provided
0/0/ No requirement

156
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IVa. Wrapping material codes in specification sequence (see J.4.6).

Specification Code
A-A-203, kraft wrapping paper CA
A-A-1249, tissue paper DA
A-A-3174, plastic sheet, polyolefin, 2 mil JA
A-A-50177, lens paper LA
QQ-A-1876, aluminum foil BA
MIL-PRF-121, greaseproof, waterproof barrier GB
MIL-PRF-121, Type I, medium duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier GC
MIL-PRF-121, Type II, light duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier GH
MIL-P-130, creped paper FA
MIL-PRF-3420, volatile corrosion inhibitor treated material MB
MIL-DTL-17667, neutral wrapping paper EA
MIL-DTL-17667, Type I, flat neutral wrapping paper EB
MIL-DTL-17667, Type II, creped neutral wrapping paper EC
MIL-PRF-22019, transparent VCI-treated barrier material JL
MIL-PRF-22191, Type III, transparent waterproof barrier material JV
MIL-PRF-81705, Type III, class 1, transparent, electrostatic protective, static K3
shielding barrier material or MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class H, Style 2 bag

157
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-V. Cushioning and dunnage material codes (see J.4.7).

Code Material
AD Cushion, anchor, block or brace as required.
BG A-A-1898, Grade II, water resistant cellulosic cushioning
BN PPP-C-850, polystyrene cushioning
DA A-A-1051, paperboard cushioning
FA PPP-C-1120, Class A, water resistant bound fiber
FE PPP-C-1120, Type II, Class A, medium soft density, water resistant bound fiber
FH PPP-C-1120, Type III, Class A, medium firm density, water resistant bound fiber
FL PPP-C-1120, Type IV, Class A, firm density, water resistant bound fiber
GA A-A-59136, cushioning material, closed cell, foam plank
GC MIL-P-19644, expanded polystyrene foam
GD MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyurethane foam
GE MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade A, flexible polyurethane foam, light
load range
GF MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade B, flexible polyurethane foam, medium
load range
GH MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade C, flexible polyurethane foam, heavy
load range
GT PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning
HA A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as a stiffener on one side of item
HB A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as a stiffener on both sides of item
HD A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves
JA ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard used as a stiffener on one side of item
JB ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard used as a stiffener on both sides of item
JC ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves
LC PPP-C-795, Class 1, cellular plastic film cushioning
LK Wood blocking and bracing, fasteners, or steel strapping, for tie-down purposes.
Rubber tired wheels shall be blocked clear of the floor of the crate or skid and
shall not be load bearing.
LN Plastic containers (vials, boxes, etc.) shall be constructed of rigid, transparent
material that, if applicable, is resistant to any lubricant or preservative being
used
LT PPP-C-795, Class 2, antistatic cellular plastic film cushioning
MA MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade A, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
MB MIL-PRF-83671, Class 1, rigid foam-in-place polyurethane

158
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-V. Cushioning and dunnage material codes (see J.4.7) – Continued.

Code Material
MD MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade B, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
NA PPP-C-795, cellular plastic film cushioning; or A-A-3129, open cell plastic
cushioning; or PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning; or A-A-59136,
polyethylene foam cushioning
NB A-A-3129, Type I, Grade B, anti-static open cell plastic cushioning; or PPP-C-
1797, Type II, polypropylene foam cushioning. Other electrostatic free
cushioning is acceptable provided it meets the static decay rate test
requirement of A-A-3129.
NG A-A-3129, open cell plastic cushioning
NS Weather resistant fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 used as
pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves; or plastic molding material conforming to MIL-
P-19644; or polyurethane foam conforming to MIL-PRF-26514
P4 MIL-DTL-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent
P5 ASTM-D5168, triple wall fiberboard used as pads, cells, sleeves, or die-cuts
P6 A-A-59135, packaging material, sheet
ZZ Special requirements. See specific instructions or drawings provided.
0/0/ No requirement

159
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-Va. Cushioning and dunnage material codes in

specification sequence (see J.4.7).

Specification Code
A-A-1051, paperboard cushioning DA
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet as a stiffener on one side of the item HA
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet as a stiffener on both sides of item HB
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves HD
A-A-1898, Grade II, water resistant cellulosic cushioning BG
A-A-3129, open cell plastic cushioning NG
A-A-59135, packaging material, sheet P6
A-A-59136, cushioning material, closed cell, foam plank GA
PPP-C-795, Class 1, cellular plastic film cushioning LC
PPP-C-795, Class 2, anti-static cellular plastic film cushioning LT
PPP-C-850, polystyrene cushioning BN
PPP-C-1120, Class A, water resistant bound fiber FA
PPP-C-1120, Type II, Class A, medium soft density, water resistant bound fiber FE
PPP-C-1120, Type III, Class A, medium firm density, water resistant bound fiber FH
PPP-C-1120, Type IV, Class A, firm density, water resistant bound fiber FL
PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning GT
PPP-P-19644, expanded polystyrene foam GC
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyurethane foam GD
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade A, flexible polyurethane foam, light load GE
range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade B, flexible polyurethane foam, medium GF
load range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade C, flexible polyurethane foam, heavy GH
load range
MIL-DTL-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent P4
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 1, rigid foam-in-place polyurethane MB
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade A, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane MA
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade B, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane MD
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard as a stiffener on one side of item JA
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard as a stiffener on both sides of item JB
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves JC
ASTM-D5168, triple wall fiberboard used as pads, cells, sleeves, or die-cuts P5

160
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VI. Thickness of cushioning or dunnage codes (see J.4.8).

Code Minimum Thickness Code Minimum Thickness

0/ Not applicable M 3 inches thick
A 1/4 inch thick N 3-1/4 inches thick
B 1/2 inch thick P 3-1/2 inches thick
C 3/4 inch thick Q 3-3/4 inches thick
D 1 inch thick R 4 inches thick
E 1-1/4 inches thick S 4-1/4 inches thick
F 1-1/2 inches thick T 4-1/2 inches thick
G 1-3/4 inches thick U 4-3/4 inches thick
H 2 inches thick V 5 inches thick
J 2-1/4 inches thick W 5-1/4 inches thick
K 2-1/2 inches thick Z Special requirements – See specific
L 2-3/4 inches thick instructions or drawings provided

Note: The above table lists minimum thicknesses. Additional cushioning may be used as
dunnage if required to fill any voids in containers resulting from use of oversized unit
containers.

161
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12).

Code Container
10/ Any suitable container included in this table may be used (see J.4.9.1).
A1 Bags made of material conforming to MIL-P-130, MIL-DTL-17667, MIL-PRF-121,
or any material authorized by MIL-DTL-117. Closure may be by staples, tape,
adhesive or heat seal.
A2 Any bag or sack used by the vendor.
AN UU-B-36, bags, paper grocers
B2 MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, one
side opaque and other side transparent bag
B3 MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 3, heavy duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
one side opaque and other side transparent bag.
B9 MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, electrostatic
protective, opaque bag.
BD MIL-DTL-117, bag.
BE MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 1, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
BL MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class B, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, transparent bag.
BS MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
BT MIL-B-22020, bag, transparent, heat sealable, VCI treated.
BV MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class C, Style 1, medium duty, waterproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
D1 PPP-B-566 or PPP-B-676, folding or setup box.
D3 PPP-B-566, PPP-B-676, or ASTM-D5118, folding, setup or fiberboard box.
D4 Vendor's setup or folding box.
DA PPP-B-566, folding paperboard box.
DE PPP-B-676, setup box.
DO Any suitable fiber box included in this table may be used (see J.4.9.1).
DP ASTM-D5168, box, triple wall, fiberboard.
DQ ASTM-D5168, Class 1, non-weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
DR ASTM-D5168, Class 2, weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
E5 ASTM-D5118, fiberboard box.
E6 Vendor's fiberboard box.
E7 ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, single wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
E8 ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, double wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
E9 ASTM-D5118, Class weather resistant fiberboard box; or PPP-B-566, water resistant
folding box; or PPP-B-676, water resistant setup box.

162
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12) – Continued.

Code Container
EC ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, corrugated fiberboard box.
ED ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, corrugated fiberboard box.
EE ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, single wall, corrugated fiberboard
box.
EN ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class domestic, solid fiberboard box.
EP ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class weather resistant, solid fiberboard box.
F2 ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2, overseas cleated plywood box or ASTM-D6880,
Class 2, heavy duty nailed wood box.
F3 ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 1, domestic cleated plywood box or ASTM-D6880,
Class 1, light duty nailed wood box.
F5 Vendor's wood box.
F6 ASTM-D6251, Type III, Treatment B, Style I or J, cleated plywood box, surface
treated in accordance with the requirements of the specification.
F7 ASTM-D6251, Type III, or ASTM-D6880, heavy or light duty, determined by
shipment destination. Provided with nominal 2" x 4" skid. Box provided with an
inspection door, located for clear reading of the humidity indicator, for Method 54
only. Inspection door shall be hinged, cleated or sealed (similar to inspection door
specified in MIL-C-104). Wood and plywood boxes shall have top panels secured
with wood screws and boxes banded. The top, one side, and one end of the box
shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER AND CUSHIONING – USE FOR
RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters, minimum 2" high. In
addition, mark box "TO OPEN – USE SCREWDRIVER" with one inch minimum
high letters. Letter sizes may be appropriately reduced in proportion to size of
container.
F9 Shallow box, constructed of plywood and wood as follows: Sides and ends of one
piece of lumber, 3/4 inch minimum thickness. Top and bottom of one piece
standard grade 3/8 inch plywood with exterior weather-resistant glue. End cleats
shall run across the grain of the ends and shall extend within 1/8 inch of the
outside surface of the top and bottom. Sides shall extend over the cleats. Battens
shall be applied in accordance with ASTM-D6880 except exterior battens or cleats
shall not be used on the top.
FA ASTM-D6880, wood box.
FB ASTM-D6880, Class 1, light duty wood box.
FC ASTM-D6880, Class 2, heavy duty wood box.
FD ASTM-D6251, Type III, wood cleated plywood box
FF ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2, wood cleated plywood box, overseas

163
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12) – Continued.

Code Container
FG ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 1, wood cleated plywood box, domestic
FL ASTM-D6251, Type II, Class 1, domestic, wood-cleated panelboard box.
FO Any suitable wood box included in this table may be used (see J.4.9.1).
FU ASTM-D6256, wood-cleated skidded box, load bearing base.
FV ASTM-D6256, Class 1, domestic, wood-cleated skidded box.
FW ASTM-D6256, Class 2, overseas, wood-cleated skidded box.
GB ASTM-D6256, Class 1 or 2. Provide box with inspection door located for clear
reading of the humidity indicator for Method 54 packages only. The inspection
door shall be hinged, cleated and sealed (similar to inspection door specified by
MIL-C-104). The top, one side and one end of the shipping container shall be
marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER – USE FOR RETURN OF NRFI
ASSEMBLY" in black letters, minimum 2" high.
HA PPP-B-96, metal can.
K1 MIL-D-6054 or MIL-D-6055, metal reusable drum, depending upon size or capacity
limits of container.
KE MIL-D-6054, reusable metal drum.
KF MIL-D-6055, reusable metal drum (capacity from 88 to 510 cu. in.).
MA MIL-C-104, wood crate, lumber or plywood sheathed, nailed or bolted.
MB MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 1, nailed wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MC MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1, bolted wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MF MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 2, nailed wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MG MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 2, bolted wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MH MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1 or 2, bolted wood crate, provided with lifting
attachments and an inspection port (Method 54 packages only). The top, one side
and one end of the crate shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER – USE FOR
RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters a minimum of two inches
high.
MO Any suitable wood crate included in this table may be used (see J.4.9.1).
MV ASTM-D6039, open and covered wood crate.
MY NAVICP Drawing No. 15024, for shipping and storage of gyroscopic instruments.
NO ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, double wall, corrugated fiberboard
box.
NR PPP-B-1672, Type I, vertical star cushioning in reusable box.
NS PPP-B-1672, Type II, folding convoluted cushioning in reusable box.
NV PPP-B-1672, Type III, telescoping encapsulated cushioning in reusable box.
NW PPP-B-1672, Type IV, horizontal star cushioning in reusable box.

164
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12) – Continued.

Code Container
NY NAVICP Drawing No. P069, molded reusable container for circuit cards and
modules.
NZ NAVICP Drawing No. 13414, modular reusable container for packaging major
repairables.
P4 MIL-DTL-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent
RC NAVICP Drawing No. 15450, modular reusable container for packaging depot level
repairables.
RD PPP-B-585, wirebound wood box.
RH MIL-DTL-2427, ammunition box, nailed wood.
RJ MIL-B-46506, ammunition box, wirebound wood.
RK MIL-PRF-11264, reusable wood containers, heavy duty.
SD MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof,
transparent bag.
SE MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 2, heavy duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
transparent bag.
SF MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class E, Style 1, light duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
SG MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class H, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic
protective, electrostatic shielding.
SH MIL-DTL-6060, complex, heat sealable, watervaporproof bags
SJ MIL-B-43666, Type III, box, consolidation
SK MIL-DTL-117, Type IV, Class E, Style 1, extra heavy duty, watervaporproof,
greaseproof, opaque bag.
WD Plastic containers constructed of rigid transparent material that, if applicable, is
resistant to lubricant or preservative being used. Containers too small for adequate
marking shall be overpackaged in envelopes for identification marking purposes.
WM PPP-T-495, mailing tube.
WY Warner-Robins Air Logistics Center Drawing Nos. 11214-5002-100, 11214-5002-
200, 11214-5002-300, or 11214-50020-400 for shipping and storage of avionics
instruments.
ZZ Special requirement – See specific instructions or drawings provided.
0/0/ No requirement.

165
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VIIa. Unit and intermediate container codes in specification

sequence (see J.4.9 and J.4.12).

Specification Code
UU-B-36, bags, paper, grocers AN
PPP-B-566, folding paperboard box. DA
PPP-B-585, wirebound wood box. RD
PPP-B-676, setup box. DE
PPP-B-1672, Type I, vertical star cushioning in reusable box. NR
PPP-B-1672, Type II, folding convoluted cushioning in reusable box. NS
PPP-B-1672, Type III, telescoping encapsulated cushioning in reusable box. NV
PPP-B-1672, Type IV, horizontal star cushioning in reusable box. NW
PPP-C-96, metal can. HA
PPP-T-495, mailing and filing tube. WM
MIL-C-104, wood crate, lumber and plywood sheathed, nailed or bolted. MA
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 1, nailed wood crate, lumber sheathed. MB
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 2, nailed wood crate, plywood sheathed. MF
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1, bolted wood crate, lumber sheathed. MC
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 2, bolted wood crate, plywood sheathed. MG
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1 or 2, bolted wood crate, provided with lifting MH
attachments and an inspection port (Method 54 packages only). The top, one
side and one end of the crate shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER –
USE FOR RETURN OR NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters a minimum of
2" high.
MIL-DTL-117, bag. BD
MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, BS
greaseproof, opaque bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 2, heavy duty, watervaporproof, SE
greaseproof, transparent bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class E, Style 3, heavy duty, watervaporproof, B3
greaseproof, one side opaque, other side transparent bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, B9
electrostatic protective, opaque bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 1, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, BE
opaque bag.

166
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VIIa. Unit and intermediate container codes in specification

sequence (see J.4.9 and J.4.12) – Continued.

Specification Code
MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, SD
transparent bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class C, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, B2
one side opaque, other side transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type II, Class E, Style 1, light duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof, SF
opaque bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type II, Class H, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic SG
protective, electrostatic shielding
MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class B, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, transparent BL
bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type III, Class C, Style 1, medium duty, waterproof, greaseproof, BV
opaque bag.
MIL-DTL-117, Type IV, Class E, Style 1, extra heavy duty, watervaporproof, SK
greaseproof, opaque bag.
MIL-DTL-2427, ammunition box, nailed wood. RH
MIL-D-6054, metal drum. reusable. KE
MIL-D-6055, metal drum, reusable (capacity from 88 to 510 cu. in.) KF
MIL-DTL-6060, complex, heat-sealable, watervaporproof bags SH
MIL-PRF-11264, reusable wood containers, heavy duty. RK
MIL-B-22020, bag, transparent, heat sealable, VCI treated BT
MIL-B-26195, wood-cleated skidded box, load bearing base. FU
MIL-B-26195, Type I, domestic wood-cleated skidded box. FV
MIL-B-26195, Type II, overseas wood-cleated skidded box. FW
MIL-B-26195, Type I or II, Style A or B, Class 1 or 2. Provide box with GB
inspection door located for clear reading of the humidity indicator for Method
54 packages only. The inspection door shall be hinged, cleated and sealed
(similar to inspection door specified by MIL-C-104). The top, one side and
one end of the shipping container shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER
– USE FOR RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters, minimum 2"
high.
MIL-B-43666, Type III, box, consolidation SJ
MIL-B-46506, ammunition box, wirebound wood. RJ
MIL-DTL-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent. P4
ASTM-D5118, fiberboard box. E5
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, corrugated fiberboard box. EC
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, single wall, corrugated fiberboard box. E7

167
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VIIa. Unit and intermediate container codes in specification

sequence (see J.4.9 and J.4.12) – Continued.

Specification Code
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, double wall, corrugated fiberboard box. E8
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, corrugated fiberboard box. ED
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, single wall, corrugated EE
fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, double wall, corrugated NO
fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5168, triple wall fiberboard box. DP
ASTM-D5168, Class 1, non-weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box. DQ
ASTM-D5168, Class 2, weather-resistant triple wall fiberboard box. DR
ASTM-D6039, open and covered wood crate. MV
ASTM-D6251, Type II, Class 1, domestic wood-cleated panelboard box. FL
ASTM-D6251, Type III, wood cleated plywood box FD
ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 1, wood cleated plywood box, domestic FG
ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2, wood cleated plywood box, overseas FF
ASTM-D6251, Type III, Treatment B, Style I or J, cleated plywood box, surface F6
treated in accordance with requirements of the specification
ASTM-D6256, wood cleated skidded box, load bearing base FU
ASTM-D6256, Class 1, domestic, wood-cleated skidded box FV
ASTM-D6256, Class 2, overseas, wood-cleated skidded box FW
ASTM-D6880, wood box FA
ASTM-D6880, Class 1, light duty wood box FB
ASTM-D6880, Class 2, heavy duty wood box FC

168
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VIII. Unit container level codes (see J.4.10).

Code Unit container level

O Unit container is not an acceptable shipping container.

A Unit container provides level A packing protection.

B Unit container provides level B packing protection.

Z Unit container requires special consideration (air only, inside storage only, etc.)

169
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-VIIIa. Optional procedure indicator codes (see J.4.10).

Code Optional procedure indicator

A Packaging is in accordance with a procedural specification or a SPI. The appropriate
specification number will be shown in-the-clear in the supplemental data area.

E Certain options can be exercised as to specific method of preservation or DoD

approved packaging materials, but only as indicated in supplemental data. However,
basic preservation method shall be retained and unit package dimensions shall not be
increased by more than one inch. Equal or better protection shall be given the item
and there shall be no increase in the package cost.

M All packaging data is mandatory for compliance and no substitutions are permitted.
Fast packs should be included in this category.

O Options can be exercised as to specific method of preservation or DoD approved

packaging materials to be used. However, basic preservation method shall be
retained, supplemental data shall be complied with, and unit package dimensions
shall not be increased by more than one inch. Equal or better protection shall be
given the item and there shall be no increase in the package cost.

P For SPI items, polyurethane foam-in-place is permitted as specified on the SPI only
when the SPI pack is not available.

170
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IX. Level A military packing requirement codes (see J.4.13).

Code Requirement
B Packing shall be accomplished using ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2, overseas
cleated plywood boxes or wirebound wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-585, Class 3
(military overseas).

C Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood wood boxes conforming to

ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2 or nailed wood boxes conforming to ASTM-D6880,
Class 2, heavy duty, or covered wood crates conforming to ASTM-D6039, Type V,
Style B, or lumber and plywood sheathed wood crates conforming to MIL-C-104, or
load-bearing base skidded wood-cleated boxes conforming to ASTM-D6256, Type II
(overseas), or steel or aluminum slotted angle crates conforming to MIL-C-9897,
Type I, or open wood crates conforming to MIL-C-3774.

E Packing shall be accomplished to meet the performance test requirements of ASTM-

D4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 1.

F Packing is not required: the unit container shall also serve as the shipping container.
Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.

Q Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with table C.II for the packing level
specified. Closure sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.

Z Special requirement. See specific instructions or drawings provided.

2 Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood boxes, overseas type,

conforming to ASTM-D6251, Type III, Class 2, or nailed wood boxes conforming to
ASTM-D6880, Class 2, heavy duty.

171
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IXa. Level B military packing requirement codes (see J.4.13).

Code Requirement
A Packing shall be accomplished using fiberboard boxes, weather resistant class,
fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, or triplewall fiberboard boxes
conforming to ASTM-D5168, class weather resistant.

F Packing is not required: the unit container shall also serve as the shipping container.
Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.

H Packing shall be accomplished using boxes fabricated in accordance with ASTM-

D5118, class weather-resistant.

P Packing shall be accomplished using open wood crates conforming to ASTM-D6039,

Type V, Style B, or open wood crates conforming to MIL-C-3774, or open steel or
aluminum slotted angle crates conforming to MIL-C-9897, Type I.

Q Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with table C-II for the packing level
specified. Closure sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with the
appropriate shipping container specification.

R Packing shall be accomplished to meet the performance test requirements of ASTM-

D4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 2.

T Packing shall be accomplished by use of fiberboard containers fabricated in

accordance with ASTM-D5118, weather-resistant class, or triple wall fiberboard
boxes conforming to ASTM-D5168, class weather resistant; or whenever practicable,
by means of shrink-film conforming to A-A-3174.

Z Special requirement. See specific instructions or drawings provided.

7 Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood boxes conforming to ASTM-

D6251, Type III, Class 1 (domestic), or nailed wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-
621, Class 1, or wirebound boxes conforming to PPP-B-585, Class 1.
8 Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with the Level A packing requirements
as specified for the item.

172
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IXb. Minimal packing requirement codes (see J.4.13).

Code Requirement
F Packing is not required; the unit container shall also serve as the shipping container.
Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.

L Packing shall be accomplished using fiberboard boxes fabricated in accordance with

ASTM-D5118, Class domestic or ASTM-D5168, class non-weather resistant.

U Items or packages that require packing for acceptance by the carrier shall be packed
in exterior type shipping containers in a manner that will ensure safe transportation
at the lowest rate to the point of delivery and shall meet, as a minimum, the
requirements of the following rules and regulations, as applicable to the mode(s) of
transportation to be utilized:

(a) Postal Regulations

(b) Department of Transportation Regulations
(c) Civil Air Regulations
(d) Uniform Freight Classification Rules
(e) National Motor Freight Classification Rules
(f) American Truckers' Association Rules
(g) Other applicable carriers' rules
(h) Military Air Regulations for dangerous materials

Consolidation of Shipments. All exterior packs of 1.5 cubic feet or less having no
single dimension (length, width, height) exceeding 40 inches (and when the total
number of such containers in any individual shipment exceeds 25), shall be
consolidated, using flat pallets, box pallets, or containers as the consolidating media.

Dangerous goods shall be prepared for shipment according to applicable

Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations and international regulations in
effect at time of shipment.

Shipments by parcel post must comply with Postal Regulations.

173
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-IXb. Minimal packing requirement codes (see J.4.13) – Continued.

Code Requirement
6 Packing shall be accomplished to meet the performance test requirements of ASTM-
D4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 3.
8 Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with the Level A packing
requirements as specified for the item.
9 Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with the Level B packing
requirements as specified for the item.
Z Special requirement – see specific instructions or drawings provided.

174
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-X. Special marking codes (see J.4.14).

Code Explanation of code Code Explanation of code

ZZ Special requirements 24 Open for inspection or use only
0/1 Fragile 32 Type I, shelf life
0/2 Arrow up 33 Type II, shelf life
0/3 Method 50 36 Fragile, arrow up, and glass
0/4 Fragile, Arrow up and Method 50 37 Fragile, arrow up
0/5 Delicate instrument 39 ESD sensitive electronic device
0/6 Delicate instrument and Arrow up requirements of MIL-STD-129
0/7 Glass – do not drop apply
12 Fragile, Method 50 40/ Markings shall be omitted for
14 Center of balance sensitive, controlled or pilferable
17 Reusable container items per MIL-STD-129
19 Method 50 reusable container 60/ Asbestos Warning Label
20/ Do not bend 0/0/ No special marking

175
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J.XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index (see J.5.1).

Document No. Table Code

A-A-203 J-IV CA

A-A-1051 J-V DA

A-A-1249 J-IV DA

A-A-1507 J-V HA, HB, HD

A-A-1898 J-V BG

A-A-3129 J-Ia DB, DC, GX

J-V NA, NB, NG

A-A-3174 J-Ia DB, DC

J-IV JA
J-IX T

A-A-50177 J-IV LA

A-A-59135 J-V P6

A-A-59136 J-V GA, NA

QQ-A-1876 J-IV BA

MMM-A-260 J-Ia AW

PPP-B-566 J-VII D1, D3, DA, E9

PPP-B-585 J-VII RD
J-IX B
J-IXa 7

PPP-B-676 J-VII D1, D3, DE, E9

176
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index – Continued.

Document No. Table Code

PPP-B-1055 J-Ia AW

PPP-B-1672 J-VII NR, NS, NV, NW

PPP-C-96 J-VII HA

PPP-C-795 J-Ia DB, DC, GX

J-V LC, LT, NA

PPP-C-850 J-V BN

PPP-C-1120 J-V FA, FE, FH, FL

PPP-C-1797 J-Ia GX
J-V GT, NA, NB

PPP-T-495 J-VII WM

MIL-C-104 J-VII F7, GB, MA, MB, MC, MF, MG, MH

J-IX C

MIL-DTL-117 J-Ia AW, DC, GS, GX

J-IV K3
J-VII A1, B2, B3, B9, BD, BE, BL, BS, BT, BV, SD,
SE, SF, SG, SK

MIL-PRF-121 J-Ia AU, BC, DR, EK, KF

J-IV GB, GC, GH
J-VII A1

MIL-P-130 J-IV FA
J-VII A1

MIL-PRF-131 J-Ia DW

177
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index – Continued.

Document No. Table Code

MIL-P-149 J-Ia KF
J-III 38

MIL-DTL-2427 J-VII RH

MIL-PRF-3150 J-III 0/7

MIL-PRF-3420 J-IV MB

MIL-C-3774 J-IX C
J-IXa P

MIL-D-6054 J-VII K1, KE

MIL-D-6055 J-VII K1, KF

MIL-PRF-6081 J-III 51

MIL-PRF-6085 J-III 17

MIL-C-6529 J-III 31, 32

MIL-PRF-7808 J-III 33

MIL-PRF-7870 J-III 50/

MIL-PRF-8188 J-III 52

MIL-PRF-10924 J-III 13

MIL-PRF-11264 J-VII RK

MIL-C-11796 J-Ia DR
J-III 0/6

178
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index – Continued.

Document No. Table Code

MIL-PRF-16173 J-Ia AH, AU, BC, DR
J-III 0/1, 0/2, 0/3, 19, 21

MIL-C-16555 J-III 27, 28, 29

MIL-DTL-17667 J-IV EA, EB, EC

J-VII A1

MIL-P-19644 J-V GC, NS

MIL-PRF-21260 J-III 10/

MIL-PRF-22019 J-Ia GS
J-IV JL

MIL-B-22020 J-Ia GS

MIL-PRF-22191 J-Ia DB, DC

J-IV JV

MIL-PRF-23699 J-III 56

MIL-PRF-23827 J-III 11

MIL-PRF-26514 J-V GD, GE, GF, GH, NS

MIL-PRF-32033 J-III 0/9

MIL-PRF-46002 J-III 20/

MIL-PRF-46010 J-III 30/

MIL-PRF-46170 J-III 15

179
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index – Continued.

Document No. Table Code

MIL-B-46506 J-VII RJ

MIL-P-53030 J-III 80/

MIL-PRF-81322 J-III 12

MIL-PRF-81705 J-Ia GX
J-IV K3

MIL-DTL-81997 J-Ia GX
J-V P4

MIL-PRF-83282 J-III 65

MIL-PRF-83671 J-V MA, MB, MD

MIL-STD-129 J-Ia GS, GX

J-X 39, 40/

ASTM-D4169 J-IX E
J-IXa R
J-IXb 6

ASTM-D4727 J-Ia JF
J-V JA, JB, JC, NS

ASTM-D5118 J-Ia DR, DW

J-VII D3, E5, E7, E8, E9, EC, ED, EE, NO
J-IXa A, H, T
J-IXb L

ASTM-D5168 J-VII DP, DQ, DR

J-IXa A, T
J-IXb L

ASTM-D5486 J-Ia AU, AW, DR

180
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

TABLE J-XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index – Continued.

Document No. Table Code

ASTM-D6039 J-VII MV
J-IX C
J-IXa P

ASTM-D6251 J-VII F2, F3, F6, F7, FD, FF, FG, FL

J-IX B, C, 2
J-IXa 7

ASTM-D6256 J-VII FU, FV, FW, GB

J-IX C

ASTM-D6880 J-VII F2, F3, F7, F9, FA, FB, FC

J-IX C, 2
J-IXa 7

NAS847 J-Ia DR

181
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

182
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

APPENDIX J

INDEX

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

Acquisition requirements ........................................6.2 ................................................................ 24

Ammunition unit load test requirements ................F.3.3 ........................................................... 121
Approval of packaging data ....................................E.6 .............................................................. 106

Bag designator conversions ....................................6.9 ................................................................ 26

Barriers (size calculations)......................................Table A-V .................................................... 59

Categorization (also see Packaging

Categorization)....................................................A.5.3..............................................................37
Fragility, weight and size category......................Table A-II .................................................... 49
Physical and chemical characteristics category...Table A-I...................................................... 48
Preservative category...........................................Table A-III ................................................... 50
Category codes........................................................A.5.3.2...........................................................38
First category – physical/chemical ......................A.5.3.2.1....................................................... 38
Second category – weight/size/fragility...............A.5.3.2.2....................................................... 39
Third category - preservatives .............................A.5.3.2.3....................................................... 39
Changes from previous issue ..................................6.7 ................................................................ 25
Classified material requirements ............................4.4 ................................................................ 10
Cleaning codes ........................................................Table J-II.................................................... 151
Code sequence format.............................................Figure A-1.................................................... 43
Code System ...........................................................J.3.1............................................................ 140
Common items (also see Packaging
Common Items) ..................................................3.3 .................................................................. 6
Container Design Retrieval System........................3.5 ...................................................................6
Appendix H................................................ 131
C.5.1.2.......................................................... 74
Containers
Exterior ................................................................C.4.2............................................................. 73
Fiberboard continer sizes.....................................Table C-III ................................................... 83
Interior .................................................................C.4.1............................................................. 73
Intermediate container codes ...............................Table J-VII. ................................................ 162
Intermediate container quantities.........................B.5.1............................................................. 68
Intermediate container requirements ...................5.3.1.............................................................. 22

183
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

Multiapplication...................................................C.5.2............................................................. 74
Availability ......................................................C.5.2.7.......................................................... 76
Design and selection ........................................C.5.2.1.......................................................... 74
Identification of ...............................................C.5.2.2.......................................................... 74
Packaging design validation ............................C.5.2.4.......................................................... 74
Selection of ......................................................Table C-IV. .................................................. 85
Types of ...........................................................C.5.2.5.......................................................... 75
C.5.2.6.......................................................... 76
Ordnance..............................................................C.5.1.3.......................................................... 74
Reusable...............................................................3.13................................................................. 8
C.5................................................................ 73
Long life...........................................................C.5.2.6.......................................................... 76
Multiapplication...............................................C.5.2.7.......................................................... 76
Short life ..........................................................C.5.2.5.......................................................... 75
Specialized.......................................................C.5.1............................................................. 73
Selection of exterior containers ...........................C.4.2............................................................. 73
Table C-II..................................................... 79
Selection of interior containers............................C.4.1............................................................. 73
Table C-I. ..................................................... 78
Shipping ...............................................................Appendix C .................................................. 70
Specially Designed ..............................................C.5.1............................................................. 73
Unit
Codes ...............................................................Table J-VII ................................................. 162
Size of ..............................................................C.3.1............................................................. 73
Use of...............................................................C.3.2............................................................. 73
Weight and size calculations ...............................Table A-V .................................................... 59
Contractual requirements ........................................4.2 ................................................................ 10
Critical items...........................................................3.6 .................................................................. 6
Critical surface/application criteria.........................A.5.3.2.1.2.................................................... 39
Cushioning material Codes .....................................Table J-V ................................................... 159
Cushioning weight and size calculations ................Table A-V .................................................... 59

Data .........................................................................Appendix E ...................................................99

Approval ..............................................................E.6 .............................................................. 106
Forms ...................................................................Figure E-1 .................................................. 117
Requirements .......................................................6.3................................................................. 24
Transmittal ...........................................................E.6.4 ........................................................... 107

184
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

Definitions ..............................................................3 ..................................................................... 6

Desiccant quantity calculations ..............................5.2.3.7.b ....................................................... 18
Design validation provisions ..................................Appendix F ................................................ 119
Disassembly of items for preservation....................5.2.4.2 .......................................................... 21
Dyring processes.....................................................5.2.1 ............................................................. 12

Electrostatic discharge sensitive items ...................5.2.4.1 .......................................................... 21

Equipment mounts ..................................................5.2.4.6 .......................................................... 21
Excess and residual material...................................4.8 ................................................................ 11
Exterior container selection ....................................Table C-II..................................................... 79
Exterior containers..................................................C.4.2............................................................. 73

Fiberboard container standard sizes........................Table C-III ................................................... 83

Formulas for weight and size calculations..............A.7................................................................ 40
Fragility factors.......................................................3.8 ...................................................................7
Approximate values .............................................Table I .......................................................... 28
Determination ......................................................4.11............................................................... 11
Fragility, weight and size category codes...............Table A-II .................................................... 49

Hazardous material .................................................3.9 ...................................................................7

4.3 ................................................................ 10
Authentication of SPIs .........................................E.6.3 ........................................................... 107
Shipping ...............................................................A.4................................................................ 36
Testing .................................................................F.3.2 ........................................................... 121

Inspection................................................................Appendix G................................................ 123

Interior containers ...................................................C.4.1............................................................. 73
Intermediate container
Quantities .............................................................B.5.1............................................................. 68
Requirements .......................................................5.3.1.............................................................. 22
Item characteristics .................................................A.5.2............................................................. 37
Item identification data ...........................................E.4.2.4 .........................................................102
Table E-I .................................................... 108

Kits..........................................................................Appendix D...................................................95
Consolidation of different items ..........................D.3.1............................................................. 95
Preservation .........................................................D.3................................................................ 95
Requirements .......................................................4.6................................................................. 10

185
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

SPI preparation ....................................................E.3.2.5 ........................................................ 101

Unit preservation .................................................D.4................................................................ 96

Levels of protection ................................................3.10 ................................................................ 7

Loose fill material ...................................................4.9 ................................................................ 11

Marking for shipment .............................................5.5 ................................................................ 23

Material, new packaging.........................................4.12 .............................................................. 11
Methods of preservation .........................................5.2.3 ............................................................. 13
Multiapplication containers ....................................C.5.2............................................................. 74

New packaging materials........................................4.12 .............................................................. 11

Ordnance containers ...............................................C.5.1.3.......................................................... 74

Packaging................................................................Appendix A...................................................31
Categorization......................................................A.5.3............................................................. 37
Predetermined data ..........................................A.5.4............................................................. 39
Code sequence .....................................................Figure A-1.................................................... 41
Codes ...................................................................Appendix J ................................................. 135
Common items .....................................................A.5.4............................................................. 39
Coded data (predetermined) ............................Table A-IV ................................................... 55
Design validation .............................................A.8................................................................ 40
Data and data form requirements.........................E.3 .............................................................. 100
Approval of contractor developed data ...........E.6 .............................................................. 106
Development of packaging data ......................E.4.1 ........................................................... 101
Item Identification Data...................................E.4.2.4 ........................................................ 102
Preservation and packaging data .....................E.4.2.5 ........................................................ 102
Preservation and packing data form ................Figure E-1 .................................................. 117
Recording data .................................................E.3.2 ........................................................... 100
SPI data............................................................E.4.2.7 ........................................................ 103
Supplemental data............................................E.4.2.6 ........................................................ 102
Transmittal of data...........................................E.6.4 ........................................................... 107
Design validation provisions ...............................Appendix F................................................. 119
Applicability of tests........................................F.3.1 ........................................................... 120
Common items.................................................A.8.1............................................................. 40
Multiplication containers.................................C.5.2.4.......................................................... 74

186
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

Selective items .................................................A.8.2............................................................. 40

Special items....................................................A.8.2............................................................. 40
Formulas for weight and size calculations...........A.7................................................................ 40
Table A-V .................................................... 59
Inspection provisions ...........................................Appendix G................................................ 123
Methods of selection............................................4.1................................................................. 10
Options.................................................................4.1.1.............................................................. 10
Procedural specifications .....................................A.3................................................................ 36
Selective items .....................................................A.5.1............................................................. 36
Special items ........................................................A.5.1............................................................. 36
Special Packaging Instructions (SPI)...................E.5 .............................................................. 103
Test (also see Packaging Design Validation
Provisions and Quality Assurance
Provisions) .......................................................Appendix F................................................. 119
Appendix G................................................ 123
Packing....................................................................5.3 .................................................................22
Container selection ..............................................5.3.2.1........................................................... 23
Intermediate container .........................................5.3.1.............................................................. 22
Military requirements ..........................................5.3................................................................. 22
Minimal requirements..........................................5.4................................................................. 23
Physical and chemical characteristic codes ............Table A-I...................................................... 43
Predetermined packaging codes..............................A.5.4............................................................. 39
Preservative category code .....................................Table A-III ................................................... 50
Preservative codes...................................................Table J-III .................................................. 152
Preservatives ...........................................................5.2.2 ..............................................................12
Application ..........................................................5.2.2.2........................................................... 12
Selection ..............................................................5.2.2.1........................................................... 12
Procedural packaging specifications.......................A.3.................................................................36
E.4.1.1 ........................................................ 101
Table A-VI................................................... 61

Quality assurance provisions ..................................5.7 ................................................................ 23

Quality assurance tests............................................G.4.............................................................. 124
Quality system ........................................................G.3.1........................................................... 124
Quantity per Unit Pack (QUP)................................Appendix B ...................................................63
Determination ......................................................B.3................................................................ 63
Factors and formulae ...........................................B.3.8............................................................. 64

187
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

Subject Paragraph/Table/Figure Page

Formula A ............................................................B.3.8.1.......................................................... 64
FormulaB .............................................................B.3.8.2.......................................................... 64

Repairable assemblies ............................................4.8 ................................................................ 11

Residual excess material .........................................4.8 ................................................................ 11
Rough handling tests (also see Testing) .................F.4.1 ........................................................... 121
Rubber items ...........................................................5.2.4.7 .......................................................... 21

Selective group items (also see Packaging

Selective Items)...................................................A.5.1............................................................. 36
Sizes of fiberboard containers.................................Table C-III ................................................... 83
Skin packaging (kits) ..............................................D.4.3............................................................. 96
Special group items (also see Packaging
Special Items) .....................................................A.5.1............................................................. 36
Special Packaging Instructions (SPI)...................E.5 .............................................................. 103
Applicability ........................................................E.5.1 ........................................................... 103
Detail requirements..............................................E.5.4 ........................................................... 105
Elements...............................................................E.5.3 ........................................................... 103
Specially designed containers.................................C.5.1............................................................. 73
Standard sizes of fiberboard containers ..................TableC-III .................................................... 83
Supersession............................................................6.8 ................................................................ 25
Supplemental data...................................................E.4.2.6 ........................................................ 102

Testing ....................................................................Appendix F .................................................119

Design validation test (also see Packaging
Design Validation Provisions).........................Appendix F................................................. 119
Preservation tests .................................................G.4.............................................................. 124
Quality assurance.................................................G.4.............................................................. 124
Rough handling....................................................F.4.1 ........................................................... 121
Transmittal of packaging data.................................E.6.4 ........................................................... 107

Unit container weight and size formula ..................Table A-V .................................................... 59

Volatile corrosion inhibiotrs, use criteria ...............5.2.2.3 .......................................................... 12

Weight and size category codes..............................Table A-II .................................................... 49

Weight and size formulas........................................Table A-V .................................................... 59
Wrap weight and size calculations..........................Table A-V .................................................... 59
Wrapping material codes ........................................Table J-IV .................................................. 156

188
 MIL-STD-2073-1E

INDEX (Continued)

CONCLUDING MATERIAL:

Custodians: Preparing activity:

Army – SM Navy – AS
Navy – AS (Project PACK-2007-003)
Air Force – 11
DLA – DH

Review activities:
Army – AR, AT, AV, CR3, EA, GL3, MI, MT
Navy – CG, MC, OS, SA, SH, YD
Air Force – 13, 19, 99
DLA – CC, CT, DM, GS, IS, LS, SS

NOTE: The activities listed above were interested in this document as of the date of this
document. Since organizations and responsibilities can change, you should verify the currency
of the information above using the ASSIST Online database at http://assist.daps.dla.mil.

189